First Edition
24_WD_OM_EN_USC
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S
MANUAL, RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
Canada
U.S.
mopar.com/om
©2023 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under license. Dodge est une marque
déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc., utilisée sous le permis. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
The Dodge app puts the latest in connectivity and convenience in the palm of your hand. The App provides access to your remote vehicle commands (if properly
equipped), service history, My Garage and the Digital Glovebox. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword
“Dodge” (U.S. residents only).
2024 DURANGO
2024 DURANGO
OWNER’S MANUAL
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can
result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly
recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers,
portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should
never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself unable to devote your full attention to
vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces
prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Dodge
brand
vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit
mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Dodge brand dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a
complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-423-6343 or by contacting
your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain
a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling
1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes
are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and
then drive.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be
seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking,
don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or
use public transportation.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard
or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no
longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in
this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and
specications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most
up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the
website on the back cover.
Vehicle images are for illustration purposes only. Actual products sold may vary.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA) CALL
1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump
Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside
Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to
restrictions and conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................... 7 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................. 14 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .................................. 69 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING .......................................................... 87 4
5 MULTIMEDIA ........................................................................... 135 5
6 SAFETY ................................................................................. 193 6
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ............................................................ 237 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE.................................................... 253 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS........................................................ 301 9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE............................................................. 307
10
11 INDEX .................................................................................... 312
11
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY ....................... 8
ROLLOVER WARNING ..................8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ....... 9
SYMBOL GLOSSARY ...................9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ...........................14
KeyFob ....................... 14
SENTRY KEY .......................16
IGNITION SWITCH ....................17
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition ........... 17
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED ............18
How To Use Remote Start ............. 18
To Exit Remote Start Mode ............18
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped ..................... 19
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . 19
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer Activation —
If Equipped ..................... 19
Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped . . 19
VEHICLE SECURIT Y SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .... 20
To Arm The System ................ 20
To Disarm The System ...............20
Rearming Of The System ............. 20
Security System Manual Override ........ 20
TamperAlert .................... 20
DOORS ..........................20
Manual Door Locks ................ 20
Power Door Locks ................. 21
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry ......21
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature —
If Equipped .....................23
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ..................... 23
STEERING WHEEL ....................24
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped ..................... 24
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped ..................... 24
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 25
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED .... 25
Programming The Memory Feature ........ 25
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory ............. 26
Memory Position Recall .............. 26
SEATS ..........................26
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped .....................26
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ......... 28
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped . 31
Heated Seats — If Equipped ...........32
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped ...... 33
Head Restraints .................. 33
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION — IF EQUIPPED . . 35
Introducing Voice Recognition ........... 35
Basic Voice Commands .............. 35
Get Started ..................... 35
Additional Information ...............36
MIRRORS ........................36
InsideRearviewMirror ............... 36
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ............. 36
Outside Mirrors ................... 37
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal — If Equipped . 37
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped .....................37
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ........... 37
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .......... 38
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HomeLink®) —
IF EQUIPPED .......................38
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . . 38
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ...... 38
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or
Non-R
olling Code Device .............. 38
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener ........................ 39
Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous
Device ........................ 39
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button . . 39
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .....40
Security ....................... 40
Troubleshooting Tips ................ 40
EXTERIOR LIGHTS .................... 41
Multifunction Lever ................. 41
Headlight Switch ..................41
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) ......... 42
High/Low Beam Switch .............. 42
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped ....... 42
Flash-To-Pass .................... 42
Automatic Headlights ............... 43
Parking Lights And Panel Lights ......... 43
Automatic Headlights With Wipers ........43
Headlight Delay ...................43
Lights-On Reminder ................43
Turn Signals .....................43
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ........ 43
2
Automatic Headlight Leveling — If Equipped . . . 43
Battery Saver ....................43
INTERIOR LIGHTS ....................44
Courtesy Lights ................... 44
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped .... 44
Ambient Light — If Equipped ............ 44
Dimmer Control ...................45
Illuminated Entry .................. 45
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ........ 45
Windshield Wiper Operation ...........45
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .......46
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ........... 46
CLIMATE CONTROLS .................. 47
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ...................... 47
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...... 52
Climate Voice Recognition .............52
Operating Tips ................... 52
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ........ 53
Storage ....................... 53
USB/AUX Control .................. 55
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped ........56
Electrical Power Outlets .............. 57
Power Inverter — If Equipped ...........58
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ...... 59
WINDOWS ........................60
PowerWindows ..................60
WindBuffeting ................... 61
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ..........61
Opening And Closing The Sunroof ........ 62
Sunshade Operation ................62
Pinch Protect Feature ............... 62
Sunroof Maintenance ............... 62
Ignition Off Operation ............... 62
HOOD ........................... 62
Opening The Hood .................62
Closing The Hood .................. 63
LIFTGATE .........................63
Power Liftgate — If Equipped ........... 63
Cargo Area Features ................ 64
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ........65
Deploying The Crossbars ............. 66
Stowing The Crossbars ............... 67
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ................ 69
Instrument Cluster Descriptions ......... 70
SRT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .............. 71
SRT Instrument Cluster Descriptions ......72
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ........... 72
Location And Controls ...............72
Engine Oil Life Reset ................73
Display And Messages ............... 74
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items .....75
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions —
If Equipped ..................... 77
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ..........78
Red Warning Lights ................. 79
Yellow Warning Lights ............... 81
Yellow Indicator Lights ...............83
Green Indicator Lights ............... 84
White Indicator Lights ............... 85
Blue Indicator Lights ................ 85
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ......85
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .................... 86
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ....................... 86
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ................. 87
Automatic Transmission ..............87
Normal Starting .................. 87
AutoPark ...................... 88
Extended Park Starting .............. 89
If Engine Fails To Start .............. 89
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) .............89
After Starting .................... 89
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
NON-SRT ......................... 89
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS –
SRT............................ 90
PARKING BRAKE .................... 90
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .............. 91
Ignition Park Interlock ............... 92
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock
(BTSI) System ................... 92
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode ............ 92
8-Speed Automatic Transmission ........ 92
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED .............95
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION ............95
Single-Speed Operating Instructions/Precautions —
If Equipped .....................95
3
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case —
If Equipped .....................96
Shifting Procedure ................. 97
TOW N GO — IF EQUIPPED ............... 97
Guidelines For Track Use ............. 98
SELEC-TRACK — IF EQUIPPED ............. 99
Custom .......................100
Active Damping System ............. 100
Launch Control .................. 100
Torque Reserve — If Equipped .......... 101
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L AND 6.4L ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED ...................... 102
POWER STEERING .................. 102
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED........102
AutostopMode .................. 102
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop ...................... 102
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . 103
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . 103
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . . 103
System Malfunction ................ 103
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED .... 103
Cruise Control ...................104
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .......... 105
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ...................... 111
ParkSense Sensors ................ 112
ParkSense Display ................ 112
ParkSense Warning Display ...........115
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .......115
Operation With A Trailer ............. 115
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . 116
Cleaning The ParkSense System ........ 116
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ..... 116
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............117
LaneSense Operation ............... 117
Turning LaneSense On Or Off .......... 117
LaneSense Warning Message ..........117
Changing LaneSense Status ........... 119
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ........119
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...............120
VEHICLE LOADING ...................120
Certification Label ................ 120
TRAILER TOWING ...................121
CommonTowingDefinitions ........... 121
Trailer Hitch Classification ............ 123
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) —
Non-SRT ...................... 124
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal —
If Equipped ..................... 124
Trailer And Tongue Weight ............ 125
Towing Requirements .............. 125
TowingTips ....................129
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) ............... 130
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . 130
Recreational Towing — Rear-Wheel Drive
Models ....................... 130
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) ..........130
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Two-Speed Transfer Case) ............ 131
DRIVING TIPS...................... 133
On-RoadDrivingTips ............... 133
Off-RoadDrivingTips ............... 133
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ................. 135
CYBERSECURITY ................... 135
UCONNECT SETTINGS .................135
Customer Programmable Features ....... 136
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION..............152
System Overview .................152
Safety And General Information ......... 153
UCONNECT MODES .................. 154
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......... 154
Radio Mode ....................154
MediaMode .................... 158
Phone Mode .................... 159
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES — IF EQUIPPED . 166
Is My Vehicle Connected? ............ 166
Introduction To Connected Vehicle Services . . 166
Getting Started With Connected Vehicle
Services ...................... 167
Using Brand Connect ...............168
Manage My Brand Connect Account ......176
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQs ............176
Connected Services SOS FAQs — If Equipped . 176
Connected Services Remote Door Lock/Unlock
FAQs ........................ 176
Connected Services Roadside Assistance
FAQs ........................177
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs —
If Equipped ..................... 177
4
Connected Services Vehicle Finder FAQs ....177
Connected Services Stolen Vehicle Assistance
FAQs — If Equipped ................ 177
Connected Services Remote Vehicle Start
FAQs ........................ 178
Connected Services Remote Horn & Lights
FAQs ........................ 178
Connected Services Account FAQs —
If Equipped ..................... 178
Data Collection & Privacy ............ 179
PERFORMANCE PAGES ................ 180
Timers ....................... 180
Gauges ....................... 181
Dynamometer (Dyno)/Engine .......... 182
G-Force .......................183
Vehicle Dynamics ................. 184
SRT DRIVE MODES — IF EQUIPPED ......... 184
Sport Mode .................... 184
Track Mode .................... 184
TowMode ..................... 185
SnowMode .................... 185
AutoMode ..................... 186
Custom Mode ................... 186
RACE OPTIONS .....................188
Launch Control .................. 189
ShiftLight ..................... 190
GUIDELINES FOR TRACK USE ............190
ECO MODE .......................191
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ..... 192
Regulatory And Safety Information ....... 192
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES................... 193
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ......... 193
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA) ....... 193
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System .... 194
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ............198
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . 198
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
With Mitigation ..................202
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . 204
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .......... 207
Occupant Restraint Systems Features .....207
Important Safety Precautions ..........207
Seat Belt Systems ................ 208
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) .... 213
Child Restraints ................. 222
SAFETY TIPS ...................... 233
Transporting Passengers ............. 233
Transporting Pets ................233
Connected Vehicles ................ 234
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
TheVehicle .................... 234
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ............... 235
Exhaust Gas ................... 235
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ........... 236
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ........... 237
SOS AND ASSIST MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED ..... 237
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED . . 239
Preparations For Jacking ............ 240
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped ........... 240
Jack Location — If Equipped ........... 240
Spare Tire Stowage — If Equipped .......241
Spare Tire Removal — If Equipped ........ 241
Jacking Instructions — If Equipped .......242
JUMP STARTING .................... 245
Preparations For Jump Start ...........246
Jump Starting Procedure ............. 246
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED .... 247
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS............. 248
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ............... 249
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............. 250
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........251
Rear-Wheel Drive Models ............ 251
All-Wheel Drive Models .............. 252
TOWING A DISABLED SRT VEHICLE ......... 252
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ......................... 252
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ...........252
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ...............253
Maintenance Plan ................ 253
SCHEDULED SERVICING — SRT ........... 255
Maintenance Plan — SRT ............256
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ............... 259
3.6L Engine ....................259
5.7L Engine ....................260
6.2L Supercharged Engine ........... 261
6.4L Engine ....................262
Checking Oil Level ................ 263
Adding Washer Fluid ............... 263
5
Maintenance-Free Battery ............ 263
Pressure Washing ................. 264
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ...............264
Engine Oil ..................... 264
Engine Oil Filter .................. 265
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............. 265
Air Conditioner Maintenance .......... 266
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ......... 268
Body Lubrication .................269
Windshield Wiper Blades ............ 269
Exhaust System .................. 271
Cooling System ..................272
Brake System ...................274
Automatic Transmission ............. 275
Front/Rear Axle Fluid .............. 275
Transfer Case ................... 276
Fuses ....................... 276
Bulb Replacement ................ 282
TIRES .......................... 284
TireSafetyInformation ............. 284
Tires — General Information ...........290
Tire Types ..................... 292
Spare Tires — If Equipped ............ 293
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...........294
Snow Traction Devices .............. 295
Tire Rotation Recommendations ........ 296
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ................ 297
Treadwear ..................... 297
Traction Grades .................. 297
Temperature Grades ............... 297
STORING THE VEHICLE ................ 298
Battery Storage Mode .............. 298
BODYWORK....................... 298
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ..... 298
Body And Underbody Maintenance ....... 298
Preserving The Bodywork ............299
INTERIORS ....................... 299
Seats And Fabric Parts ..............299
Plastic And Coated Parts .............299
Leather Surfaces .................300
Glass Surfaces .................. 300
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ...... 301
BRAKE SYSTEM .................... 301
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .... 301
Torque Specifications ............... 301
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ................ 302
3.6L Engine ....................302
5.7L Engine ....................302
6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine ......302
Reformulated Gasoline ............. 302
Materials Added To Fuel .............302
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .......... 302
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . 303
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications .... 303
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) In Gasoline ................303
Fuel System Cautions ..............303
FLUID CAPACITIES ................... 304
FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT ...............304
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .........305
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ........305
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — SRT .....306
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — SRT .... 306
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE ..................307
Prepare For The Appointment .......... 307
Prepare A List ................... 307
Be Reasonable With Requests ......... 307
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............. 307
Roadside Assistance ...............307
FCA US LLC Customer Center ..........308
FCA Canada Customer Care ...........308
Mexico .......................308
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ....... 308
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............... 308
Service Contract ................. 308
WARRANTY INFORMATION .............. 309
MOPAR®PARTS ...................309
REPORTING SAFET Y DEFECTS ............ 309
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. ................. 309
In Canada ..................... 310
Ordering and Accessing Additional Owner’s
Information ......................310
Change Of Ownership Or Address .......... 310
General Information .................. 310
6
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Dodge vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from many
passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road
use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on
different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome
the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly
may result in loss of control or a collision
page 133.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of
the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the
instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you
should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information,
which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording "If Equipped". All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle
in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for
technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service remember that authorized dealers know your Dodge best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.
7
1
SYMBOLS KEY
WARNING! These statements apply to operating pro-
cedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION! These statements apply to procedures
that could result in damage to your
vehicle.
NOTE: A suggestion which will improve installa-
tion, operation, and reliability. If not fol-
lowed, may result in damage.
TIP: General ideas/solutions/suggestions on
easier use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional infor-
mation on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many pas-
senger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applica-
tions. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the
higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control, it may roll over while some other
vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that
can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe
or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce
disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-
nificantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
Rollover Warning Label
8 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthi-
ness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when oper-
ating your vehicle. See the following for the definition of each symbol
page 78.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
page 79
Air Bag Warning Light
page 79
Brake Warning Light
page 79
Red Warning Lights
Battery Charge Warning Light
page 79
Door Open Warning Light
page 79
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
page 80
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
page 80
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
page 80
Hood Open Warning Light
page 80
INTRODUCTION 9
1
Red Warning Lights
Liftgate Open Warning Light
page 80
Oil Pressure Warning Light
page 80
Oil Temperature Warning Light
page 80
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
page 80
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
page 81
Vehicle Security Warning Light
page 81
Yellow Warning Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
page 82
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
page 81
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
page 81
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
page 82
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
page 82
Low Fuel Warning Light
page 82
10 INTRODUCTION
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
page 81
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
page 82
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Light
page 82
Service AWD Warning Light
page 82
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
page 82
LaneSense Warning Light
page 81
Yellow Warning Lights
Service LaneSense Warning Light
page 81
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
page 82
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light
page 83
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Low Indicator Light
page 83
NEUTRAL Indicator Light
page 83
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light
page 83
INTRODUCTION 11
1
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Indicator Light
page 84
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target Indicator Light
page 84
ECO Mode Indicator Light
page 84
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
page 84
LaneSense Indicator Light
page 84
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
page 84
Green Indicator Lights
Snow Mode Indicator Light
page 84
Sport Mode Indicator Light
page 84
Sport Mode Indicator Light
page 84
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
page 84
Tow Mode Indicator Light
page 84
Track Mode Indicator Light
page 84
12 INTRODUCTION
Green Indicator Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
page 84
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light
page 85
Custom Mode SRT Indicator Light
page 85
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
page 85
Speed Warning Indicator Light
page 85
LaneSense Indicator Light
page 85
White Indicator Lights
Valet Mode SRT Indicator Light
page 85
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
page 85
INTRODUCTION 13
1
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), Remote Start (if equipped),
and remote power liftgate operation. The key fob allows
you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate from dis-
tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob
does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate
the system. The key fob also contains an emergency
key, which is stored in the rear of the key fob.
NOTE:
•
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the
key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or
other electronic device. This may result in poor
performance.
•
With ignition in the ON position and the vehicle mov-
ing at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are
disabled.
NOTE:
For SRT Models:
•
SRT vehicles equipped with the 6.2L engine come
with two red key fobs, that allow for different engine
power levels
page 184.
•
Only 6.2L engine vehicles can come equipped with
red key fobs.
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully
depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified
by referring to the instrument cluster, which will display
directions to follow
page 310.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once
to unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five seconds
to unlock all the doors and the liftgate. To lock all the
doors and the liftgate, push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash
and the illuminated entry system will be activated.
When the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash
and the horn will chirp.
NOTE:
•
If the vehicle is unlocked with the key fob, and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
relock and the security system will arm
(if equipped).
•
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock
again automatically if the key fob is left inside the
passenger compartment, otherwise the doors will
stay locked.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button within Uconnect Settings
page 135.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and
visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
Key Fob
1 — Unlock
2 — Liftgate
3 — Emergency Key
4 — Lock
5 — Remote Start
6—Panic
14
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along
with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
•
The doors have to be open and then closed in order
for the vehicle to detect a key fob. The Key Left
Vehicle feature will activate when the first door is
closed and no key fob is detected in the vehicle. If
the warning has been activated, and the other doors
are closed, no other warnings will be issued.
•
These alerts will not be activated in situations where
the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob
inside, or the key fob’s wireless signals are blocked.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one
CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
•
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin
battery dimensions.
•
Perchlorate material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
•
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the
back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding the emer-
gency key release (1) on the back of the key fob and
pulling the emergency key out with your other hand.
2. Separate the key fob halves using a flat-blade
screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry the two halves
of the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the
seal during removal.
3. Remove the back cover to access and replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the (+)
sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the inside of
the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid
touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils
may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a bat-
tery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
Emergency Key Removal
1 — Emergency Key Release
2 — Emergency Key
Emergency Key Removal
Separating Case With A Coin
Key Fob Battery Replacement
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
WARNING!
•
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
•
If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
•
Keep new and used batteries away from children.
If the battery compartment does not close
securely, stop using the product and keep it away
from children.
Programming And Requesting
Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
•
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be repurposed and reprogrammed to another
vehicle.
•
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
•
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position when exiting the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
•
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
•
Emergency keys must be ordered to the correct key
cut to match the vehicle locks.
•
It is not mandatory to replace the key fob if a new
emergency key is needed, and vice versa.
NOTE:
For SRT Models: Vehicles equipped with the 6.2L and
6.4L engines, black key fobs must be replaced with
black key fobs and red key fobs must be replaced with
red key fobs
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The sys-
tem does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is
locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unau-
thorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that
are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off
in two seconds if an invalid key fob is used to start the
engine.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position,
the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds
for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb
check, it indicates that there is a problem with the elec-
tronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
key fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions
will result in the engine being shut off after two
seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the elec-
tronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as
soon as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
page 310.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also consid-
ered an invalid key.
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob
is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several operating
modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in posi-
tion. These modes are OFF, ACC, ON/RUN, and START.
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
•
The engine is stopped
•
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm,
etc.) are still available
ACC
•
Engine is not started
•
Some electrical devices are available (e.g. power
windows, etc.)
ON/RUN
•
Driving position
•
All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate con-
trols, etc.)
START
•
The engine will start (when foot is on the brake
pedal)
NOTE:
If the ignition position does not change with a push of
the ignition button, and the instrument cluster display
message “Key Fob Not Detected” is being displayed,
the key fob may have a low or depleted battery. In this
situation, a backup method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side
opposite of the emergency key) against the START/
STOP ignition button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
WARNING!
•
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake. Always make sure the keyless ignition is in
the OFF position, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-
less Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove the key fobs from vehicle, place the
ignition in the OFF position and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
•
For more information on normal starting proce-
dures, see
page 87.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2—ACC
3 — ON/RUN
Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
•
When opening the driver's door with the ignition in
ON/RUN (engine not running), a chime will sound to
remind you to place the ignition in the OFF position.
In addition to the chime, the message will display
“Ignition Or Accessory On” in the cluster.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
while still maintaining security. The system
has a range of 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambi-
ent conditions before the customer enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range
page 310.
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon mon-
oxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon mon-
oxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
•
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will
lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp
twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a
15 minute cycle. Pushing the Remote Start button a
third time shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and with a
valid Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob in the vehicle, place
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
•
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
•
Remote Start can only be used twice.
•
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
•
The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
For security, power window and sunroof
(if equipped) operation is disabled when the vehicle
is in the Remote Start mode.
•
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated
for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Gear selector in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Liftgate closed
•
Hazard switch off
•
Brake pedal not pressed
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level
•
Panic button not pressed
•
System not disabled from previous Remote Start
event
•
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
•
Ignition in OFF position
•
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
•
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
•
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon mon-
oxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon mon-
oxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
•
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start sys-
tem, either push and release the unlock button on the
key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security system
(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute
cycle, push and release the START/STOP ignition
button.
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again, or
if the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute
cycle. Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the climate controls will resume the previously set
operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
•
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
•
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
— Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instru-
ment cluster display until you push the START/STOP
ignition button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or
less. The timing is dependent on the ambient tempera-
ture. Once the timer expires, the system will automati-
cally adjust the settings depending on ambient condi-
tions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped” in the next section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT
SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather. The
heated steering wheel and driver heated seat feature
will turn on if selected in the Comfort menu screen
within Uconnect Settings
page 135. In warm
weather, the driver vented seat feature will automati-
cally turn on when Remote Start is activated, if pro-
grammed in the Comfort menu screen. The vehicle will
adjust the climate control settings depending on the
outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls will automatically adjust to the
optimal temperature and mode settings depending on
the outside ambient temperature. This will occur until
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, where
the climate controls will resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
•
In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the climate settings will default to maximum heat,
with fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost
timer expires, the vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
•
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based on
the last settings selected by the driver.
•
In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or above,
the climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level
Mode, and Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see
page 47.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position. The climate control settings will change if
manually adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in
Remote Start mode, and exit automatic override. This
includes the OFF button on the climate controls, which
will turn the system off.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD
WIPER DE-ICER ACTIVATION —
IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL
MESSAGE — IF EQUIPPED
One of the following messages will display in the instru-
ment cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start
or exits Remote Start prematurely:
•
Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
•
Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
•
Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
•
Remote Start Canceled — Liftgate Open
•
Remote Start Canceled — Timer Expired
•
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays active
until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle
Security system is armed, interior switches for door
locks and liftgate release are disabled. If something
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security system will pro-
vide the following audible and visible signals:
•
The horn will pulse
•
The parking lights and/or turn signals will flash
•
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. If any doors, windows, or sunroof are open, close
them.
2. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
○
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, make
sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition system is OFF.
3. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
○
Push lock on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
○
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob available in
the same exterior zone
page 21.
○
Push the lock button on the key fob.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any
of the following methods:
•
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
•
Grab the Passive Entry unlock door handle
(if equipped)
page 21.
•
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
NOTE:
•
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm
the Vehicle Security system. Use of the door key cyl-
inder when the alarm is armed will sound the alarm
when the door is opened.
•
The Vehicle Security system remains armed when
the power liftgate is opened using the liftgate button
on the key fob. If someone enters the vehicle
through the opened liftgate, then opens any door
from the inside, the alarm will sound.
•
If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock the
liftgate, the Vehicle Security system is disarmed and
the rest of the vehicle doors will remain locked
unless all doors are set to unlock on first press
within Uconnect Settings.
•
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the inte-
rior power door lock switches will not unlock the
doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security system will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken
to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the
horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds
between cycles and up to eight cycles if the trigger
remains active) and then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL
OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
TAMPER ALERT
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security system
in your absence, the horn will sound three times and
the exterior lights will blink three times when you dis-
arm the Vehicle Security system.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked from
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock
each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is
closed, the door will lock. Make sure the key fob is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-
less Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Unsupervised use of the vehicle equipment may
cause severe person injuries and death.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on each front
door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors
and liftgate.
If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the
door will lock. Make sure the key fob is not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop,
or other electronic device, the wireless signal may get
blocked, and the driver’s door may not unlock
automatically.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN position, and the driver's door is
open, the doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ —
PASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry. This
feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or
unlock buttons.
NOTE:
•
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off within
Uconnect Settings
page 135.
•
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Pas-
sive Entry system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob's wireless signal and
prevent the Passive Entry handle from locking/
unlocking the vehicle.
Manual Door Lock Knob
Power Door Lock Switches
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
•
Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated approach
(low beams, license plate lamp, position lamps) for
whichever duration is set between 0, 30, 60 or
90 seconds. Passive Entry unlock also initiates two
flashes of the turn signal lamps.
•
If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing, or
there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry door
handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
•
The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the
Passive Entry door handles if the key fob is located
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
handle.
•
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
relock and will arm the Vehicle Security system (if
equipped).
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the door handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle.
Grabbing the driver’s door handle will unlock the driver
door automatically. Grabbing the passenger door
handle will unlock all doors and the liftgate automati-
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock when
you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle, depend-
ing on the selected setting in the Uconnect system
page 135.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive
Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature, which will function if the ignition is in
the OFF position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open, and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed, the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry key
fob. If one of the vehicle's Passive Entry key fobs is
detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid Passive
Entry key fobs are detected outside the vehicle, the
Passive Entry system automatically unlocks all vehicle
doors and chirps the horn three times (on the third
attempt, ALL doors will lock, and the Passive Entry key
fob can be locked in the vehicle).
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate handle. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, pull the electronic
liftgate handle for a power open on vehicles equipped
with a power liftgate. Pull the electronic liftgate handle
and lift for manual liftgate vehicles.
NOTE:
•
If the vehicle is unlocked, the liftgate will open with
the handle and no key fob is required.
•
The liftgate will either unlock along with the vehicle
doors, or it will need to be unlocked by pushing the
electronic liftgate release, depending on the
selected setting in the Uconnect system
page 135.
•
The liftgate (and vehicle doors if unlocked) must be
locked using the lock button on the key fob, the Pas-
sive Entry lock button, or the lock buttons on the
interior front door panels.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock button located
to the right of electronic liftgate handle.
NOTE:
When you push the button on the liftgate, either only
the liftgate will unlock or all doors and the liftgate will
unlock, depending on the selected setting in the
Uconnect system
page 135.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within
5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, push the door handle lock button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
NOTE:
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the door handle lock button. This fea-
ture can be turned on or off within Uconnect Settings
page 135.
NOTE:
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
•
After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the
doors, using either Passive Entry door handle or
door handle button. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door
handle without the vehicle unlocking.
•
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key
fob battery is depleted.
•
Close proximity to mobile devices can affect the Pas-
sive Entry system.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key
fob lock button or the lock button located on the vehi-
cle’s interior door panel
page 310.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK ON EXIT
FEATURE — IF EQUIPPED
If Auto Unlock is enabled within Uconnect Settings
page 135, this feature will unlock all the doors
when any door is opened if the vehicle is in PARK.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
SYSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door
Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the lock or unlock position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Electronic Liftgate Handle
1 — Electronic Release Switch
2 — Lock Button Location
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
NOTE:
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the
lock knob up (unlocked position), lower the window, and
open the door with the outside door handle.
STEERING WHEEL
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING
STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever
is located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the lever down-
ward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,
pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired. To lock the steering column in position, push
the lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING
STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column control is located below the multifunc-
tion lever on the steering column.
Use the four-way control to adjust the steering column.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Handle
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Location
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Settings, use
the key fob or the memory switch on the driver's door
trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column
to saved positions
page 25.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating ele-
ment that helps warm your hands in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel has only
one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until
the operator turns it off. The heated steering wheel may
not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel button is located within the
Uconnect system and, if equipped, on the instrument
panel below the radio. You can access the button
through the Climate or Controls menu of the
touchscreen.
•
Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heating element on.
•
Press the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 19.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabe-
tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exer-
cise care when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, espe-
cially if used for long periods.
•
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steer-
ing wheel covers of any type of material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile saves desired position set-
tings for the following features:
•
Driver seat
•
Easy Entry/Exit seat (if equipped)
•
Side mirrors
•
Power tilt and telescopic steering column
(if equipped)
•
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can
be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
•
Be sure to program the radio presets prior to pro-
gramming the memory settings.
The memory setting switch is located on the driver’s
door trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
•
The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
•
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall
either of two saved memory profiles.
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY
FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the selected
profile from memory.
Memory Setting Buttons
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and tele-
scopic steering column [if equipped], and radio sta-
tion presets).
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch, and
then push the desired memory button (1 or 2) within
five seconds. The instrument cluster display will dis-
play which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory
profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY KEY FOB
TO MEMORY
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two
saved memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must select the
“Personal Settings Linked To Fob” feature through the
Uconnect Settings
page 135.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
release the set (S) button on the memory switch.
Then, within five seconds, push and release button
(1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2)
will display in the instrument cluster display.
4. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked from your memory set-
tings by pushing the set (S) button, and within 10 sec-
onds, followed by pushing the unlock button on the key
fob.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK,
a message will be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two,
push the desired memory button (1 or 2) or the unlock
button on the key fob linked to the desired memory
position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or by pushing any of
the seat adjustment switches. When a recall is can-
celed, the driver's seat and telescopic steering column
(if equipped) will stop moving. A delay of one second
will occur before another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
(FRONT SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dan-
gerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not
be adjusted properly and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Passenger Seat
Forward/Rearward Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a manual front
passenger seat. The passenger seat can be adjusted
forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front
of the seat cushion, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rear-
ward. Release the bar once you have reached the
desired position. Then, using body pressure, move for-
ward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback
Adjustment — Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the out-
board side of the seat, lean back to the desired position
and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the
lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat
Feature — If Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift
the recline lever and push the seatback forward. To
return to the seating position, raise the seatback and
lock it into place.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dan-
gerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not
be properly adjusted, and you could be severely
injured or killed. Only adjust a seat while the
vehicle is parked.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision, you could slide under the seat belt and
be severely injured or killed. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
Adjustment Bar
Recline Lever
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's
path.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
(REAR SEATS)
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
60/40 Split Rear Seat — If Equipped
SECOND ROW FOLD-FLAT SEATS
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the out-
board side of the seat.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by sim-
ply unfolding the seats to the open position, over time
the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
EASY ACCESS FOR THIRD ROW
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located
behind the seatback.
Release Lever
Fold-Flat Second Row Seats
Release Lever
Tumble Pull Strap
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
TO RAISE REAR SEAT
Fold the seat rearward to its original position, and lock
it into place. Then lift the head restraint until it locks
into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Rear Captain’s Chairs — If Equipped
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS FOLD-FLAT
SEATS
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the out-
board side of the seat.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by sim-
ply unfolding the seats to the open position, over time
the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
EASY ACCESS FOR THIRD ROW
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located
behind the seatback.
Tumbled Second Row
Release Lever
Fold-Flat Second Row Seats
Release Lever
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
3. If your vehicle is equipped with a mini console, there
is a stepping pad to allow passengers to easily
access the third row seats.
TO RAISE REAR SEAT
Fold the seat rearward to its original position, and lock
it into place. Then lift the head restraint until it locks
into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Folding Third Row
Both third row seats can be folded forward to increase
the cargo area. To lower either seat, pull on the release
handle located on the back of the seat and lower the
seat using the pull strap located next to the release
handle.
NOTE:
The second row seats must be in their full upright posi-
tion, folded flat or tumbled when folding the third row
seats.
To raise the seat, pull the seat toward you using the
strap located on the back of the seat. Then lift the head
restraint until it locks into place.
Tumble Strap Mini Console Stepping Pad Release Handles
Third Row Folded
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by sim-
ply unfolding the seats to the open position, over time
the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
POWER ADJUSTMENT
(FRONT SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the seat.
There are two switches that control the movement of
the seat cushion and the seatback.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or
Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward by
using the seat switch. The seat will move in the direc-
tion of the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the rear of seat
switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in two
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
of the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rear-
ward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position is
reached.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's
path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on
the switch will raise and lower the position of the
support.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning
to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting
the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you place the
vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
•
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is
greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) for-
ward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its pre-
viously set position when you place the vehicle’s
ignition in the ACC or RUN position.
•
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not available when
the driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch
(22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position,
there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat
for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and
Easy Exit positions are stored in each Driver Memory
Setting profile
page 25.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or disabled)
through the programmable features in the Uconnect
system
page 135.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabe-
tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical condition must exer-
cise care when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cush-
ion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could
cause serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are
located on the center stack below the radio
screen, or within the Uconnect system.
•
Press the heated seat switch once to turn the HI
setting on.
•
Press the heated seat switch a second time to turn
the MED setting on.
•
Press the heated seat switch a third time to turn the
LO setting on.
•
Press the heated seat switch a fourth time to turn
the heating elements off.
NOTE:
•
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
•
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
•
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 19.
Power Lumbar Switch
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
The two second row outboard seats may be
equipped with heated seats. There are two
heated seat switches that allow the rear pas-
sengers to operate the seats independently.
The heated seat switches for each heater are located
on the rear of the center console.
You can choose from HI, LO, or off heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat
in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for off.
•
Push the switch once to turn the HI setting on.
•
Push the switch a second time to turn the LO setting
on.
•
Push the switch a third time to turn the heating ele-
ments off.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
FRONT VENTILATED SEATS —
IF EQUIPPED
The ventilated seats control buttons are
located on the center stack below the radio
screen, or within the Uconnect system. The
fans operate at three speeds: HI, MED,
and LO.
•
Press the ventilated seat switch once to choose HI.
•
Press the ventilated seat switch a second time to
choose MED.
•
Press the ventilated seat switch a third time to
choose LO.
•
Press the ventilated seat switch a fourth time to
turn the ventilation off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 19.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the
top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear.
WARNING!
•
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
•
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Front Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front four-way driver and
passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see an authorized
dealer.
To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of the
head restraint toward the front of the vehicle as desired
and release. To adjust the head restraint rearward, pull
the top of the head restraint to the forward most posi-
tion and release. The head restraint will return to the
rear most position.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
WARNING!
•
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
•
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not
adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the
rear seat is folded to a load floor position, but do not
return to their normal position when the rear seat is
raised. After returning either seat to its upright position,
raise the head restraint until it locks in place. The out-
board head restraints are not removable.
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it or push down-
ward on the head restraint to lower it.
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head
restraints are in their upright positions when the seat
is to be occupied.
NOTE:
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, see
page 207.
Head Restraint Removal — Rear Seats
The center head restraint can be adjusted when occu-
pied, or removed for Child Seat Tethering. To remove
the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go by pulling
upward. Then, push the release button at the base of
the post while pulling the head restraint upward. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust the
head restraint to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
•
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the preceding reinstallation instructions prior to
operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
•
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its low-
ered position could result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Always make sure the outboard head
restraints are in their upright positions when the
seat is to be occupied.
Forward Adjustment
Rear Head Restraint
Center Head Restraint Release Button
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, see
page 207.
WARNING!
•
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow
removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
•
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the preceding reinstallation instructions prior to
operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Power Folding Third Row Head
Restraints
For improved visibility when in REVERSE, the third row
head restraints can be folded using the Uconnect
system.
Press the Controls button located on the bottom of the
Uconnect display.
Press the Headrest Fold button to power fold
the third row head restraints.
NOTE:
•
The head restraints can only be folded downward
using the Headrest Fold button. The head restraints
must be raised manually when occupying the third
row.
•
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
third row seats.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION —
IF EQUIPPED
INTRODUCING VOICE
RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect
system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following Voice Commands can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
or for the Uconnect 5 NAV With
10.1-inch Display, say the vehicle’s Wake Up word, “Hey
Uconnect”. After the beep, say:
•
“ Cancel” to stop a current voice session
•
“ Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
•
“ Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice rec-
ognition system’s status. Cues appear on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
On Uconnect 5 systems, the factory default Wake Up
word is set to “Hey Uconnect” and can be repro-
grammed through the Uconnect Settings.
GET STARTED
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
•
Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may
impact recognition.
•
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead.
•
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the
VR button, wait until after the beep, then say your
Voice Command. You can also say the vehicle Wake
Up word and state your command. Some examples
of Wake Up words include “Hey Uconnect” or “Hey
Dodge”.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Voice
Recognition
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
•
A passenger can press the VR button shortcut on
the radio status bar to also issue a command.
•
You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a
Voice Command from the current category.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2023 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and
all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
page 310.
Uconnect System Support:
•
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call:
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
•
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or
call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
(French)
Brand Connect services support:
•
US residents visit https://www.driveuconnect.com/
or call: 1-833-616-7527
•
Canadian residents visit
https://www.driveuconnect.ca/en or
call: 1-833-648-1611
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Automatic Dimming Mirror
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the
view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view viewing.
You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the button
at the base of the mirror. A light in the button will illumi-
nate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated.
Some vehicles may be equipped with an auto dimming
mirror with no on/off button in the mirror. If that is the
case, the mirror will default to auto dimming on and the
feature can be disabled in the radio though the button
on the touchscreen.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors and lift the cover.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
2 — For The Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display:
Push The Voice Recognition Button To Start A Phone
Call, Begin Radio, Media, Navigation (If Equipped) And
Climate Functions, Or Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles
Equipped With Navigation: Push The Voice Recognition
Button To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Climate,
Start Or Answer A Phone Call, And Send Or Receive A
Text
2 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles Not
Equipped With Navigation: Push The Phone Button To
Answer An Incoming Phone Call
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Sun Visor Slide-On-Rod Feature —
If Equipped
The sun visor Slide-On-Rod feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the
sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional sun
blockage.
NOTE:
The sun visor blade can also be extended while the sun
visor is against the windshield for additional sun block-
age through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of
the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the
size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
•
Full forward position
•
Full rearward position
•
Normal position
OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN
SIGNAL — IF EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
lighting contain LEDs, which are located in the lower
outer corner of each mirror.
The LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash with
the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and
rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning
flashers will also activate these LEDs.
OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING
MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The driver’s side outside mirror will automatically adjust
for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is con-
trolled by the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mir-
ror will automatically adjust for headlight glare when
the inside mirror adjusts.
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The power mirror switch is located on the driver's side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push the mirror select button for the mirror that
you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch,
push on any of the four arrows for the direction that you
want the mirror to move.
Power mirror positions can be saved to a Driver Memory
Settings profile (if equipped)
page 25.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Left Mirror Selection
2 — Mirror Direction Control
3 — Right Mirror Selection
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
This feature will be activated whenever you
turn on the rear window defroster
(if equipped)
page 47.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HomeLink®) — IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
•
HomeLink® replaces up to three
hand-held transmitters that operate
devices such as garage door open-
ers, motorized gates, lighting, or
home security systems. The HomeLink® unit is pow-
ered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
•
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sun visor designate the three
different HomeLink® channels.
•
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons
will activate the devices they are programmed to
with each press of the corresponding HomeLink®
button.
•
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security sys-
tem is active
page 310.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended
that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmit-
ter of the device that is being programmed to the
HomeLink® system. Make sure your hand-held trans-
mitter is programmed to activate the device you are
trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of
your HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
CHANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons
(I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the
HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE
A ROLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING
CODE DEVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether the
device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device
with a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately visible when
looking at the device. The name and color of the button
may vary slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN”
or “TRAIN” button.
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
Scan me
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate
your garage door opener motor, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this pro-
cedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® but-
ton you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the garage door
opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indica-
tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this
happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code
final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code
final step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can usu-
ally be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door
opener motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to con-
firm that the garage door opener motor operates. If
the garage door opener motor does not operate,
repeat the final steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly, pro-
gramming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to con-
firm that the garage door opener motor operates. If
the garage door opener motor does not operate,
repeat the steps from the beginning.
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transmit-
ter. Do not program the transmitter if people or
pets are in the path of the door or gate.
•
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or con-
fined area while programming the transmitter.
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
(Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and
can cause you and others to be severely injured or
killed.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
MISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a mis-
cellaneous device follows the same procedure as pro-
gramming to a garage door opener
page 39. Be
sure to determine if the device has a rolling code, or
non-rolling code before beginning the programming
process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmit-
ter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to time-out in the same manner. The pro-
cedure may need to be performed multiple times to
successfully pair the device to your HomeLink®
buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the
new device you want to program the HomeLink® button
to has a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step
2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
PROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmit-
ter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
place the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure
while programming HomeLink® with the engine on
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that
the garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button
while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may
take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The
garage door may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
○
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pushed.
○
To program the two remaining HomeLink® but-
tons, repeat each step for each remaining but-
ton. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® universal transmitter is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the garage door opener hand-
held transmitter.
•
Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener
to complete the training for a rolling code.
•
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transmitter. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transmit-
ter. Do not program the transmitter if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transmitter with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener with-
out these safety features.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The head-
light switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the head-
light switch is placed in the parking lights position. How-
ever, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be acti-
vated along with the front and rear marker lights. The
DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake is
engaged.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel
lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights,
rotate the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
Multifunction Lever
Headlight Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Switch
2 — Dimmer Control
3 — Fog Light Switch
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
1 — Rotate Headlight Switch
2 — Dimmer Control
3 — Fog Light Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise from the parking lights and instrument panel
lights position to the first detent to turn on headlights,
parking lights, and instrument panel lights. Rotate the
headlight switch to the second detent for the AUTO
position.
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must
be followed.
•
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on whenever
the engine is running. The lights will remain on until the
ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the parking
brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be used
during normal nighttime driving.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front
fog lights are turned on.
•
If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle
was purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
page 135.
•
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate or reduce intensity on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that
side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when the haz-
ard warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling
the multifunction back will turn the low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by auto-
matically controlling the high beams through the use of
a camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This
camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically
switches from high beams to low beams until the
approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
•
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off by selecting or deselecting “Auto
Dim High Beams” within your Uconnect Settings
page 135, as well as turning the headlight
switch to the AUTO position.
•
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and tail-
lights of vehicles in the field of view will cause head-
lights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the wind-
shield or camera lens will cause the system to func-
tion improperly.
•
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be
re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See a local
authorized dealer.
•
To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitiv-
ity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle high
beam lever six full on/off cycles within 10 seconds
of ignition ON. System will return to default setting
upon ignition off.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and
remain on, until the lever is released.
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. The headlight time delay
can be programmed 0/30/60/90 seconds within
Uconnect Settings
page 135.
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the automatic mode.
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL
LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off
the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to
the O (off) position.
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the head-
light switch is placed in the parking lights position. How-
ever, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be acti-
vated along with the front and rear marker lights. The
DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake is
engaged.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS WITH
WIPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on. This feature is programmable
through the Uconnect system
page 135.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the daytime, the
vehicle will monitor outside brightness and decide if the
instrument panel needs to be dimmed or not
page 45.
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight delay
feature will leave the headlights on for up to 90 sec-
onds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is placed
in the OFF position while the headlight switch is on, and
then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight delay
can be canceled by either turning the headlight switch
on then off, or by placing the ignition in the ON position.
NOTE:
The headlight delay timing is programmable through
the Uconnect system
page 135.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left
on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the
vehicle will chime when the driver’s door is opened.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHT
LEVELING — IF EQUIPPED
This feature prevents the headlights from interfering
with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling
automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam
in reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior lights to
protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
After 10 minutes, if the ignition is OFF and any door is
left open or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up
to the dome light on position, the interior lights will
automatically turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is ON.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is placed
in the OFF position, the exterior lights will automatically
turn off after eight minutes. If the headlights are turned
on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened or when the dimmer control is
rotated to its upward most position. If your vehicle is
equipped with a key fob and the unlock button is
pushed, the courtesy and dome lights will turn on.
When a door is open and the interior lights are on,
rotating the dimmer control all the way down, to the O
(off) position, will cause all the interior lights to go out.
This allows the doors to stay open for extended periods
of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
FRONT MAP/READING LIGHTS —
IF EQUIPPED
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
can be turned on by pushing the switch on either side
of the console. These buttons are backlit for nighttime
visibility.
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time.
The lights also turn on when a door is opened. The
lights will also turn on when the unlock button on the
key fob is pushed.
AMBIENT LIGHT — IF EQUIPPED
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light illuminates for improved visibility of
the floor and center console area.
Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Ambient Light
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DIMMER CONTROL
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odom-
eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
to its upward most position until you hear a click. This is
useful when headlights are required during the day.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
When programmed with the Uconnect system, the
headlights and courtesy lights will turn on when you use
the key fob to unlock the doors or open any door
page 135.
The time the lights stay on is programmable up to
90 seconds. The lights will fade to off after the pro-
grammed time, or they will immediately fade to off once
the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position
from the OFF position.
The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
lights will not turn off if the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated to the upward most position, past the
detent. The overhead and door courtesy lights will turn
off after 10 minutes when the ignition is placed in the
OFF position to protect the battery.
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
instrument panel dimmer switch is rotated all the way
downward to the O (off) position.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on
the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering
column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a
switch, located on the end of the lever.
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four
detent positions for intermittent settings, the fifth
detent for low wiper operation and the sixth detent for
high wiper operation.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the parked
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the parked position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wipers
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 sec-
onds between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one
second (fourth detent). If the vehicle is moving less
than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Dimmer Control
Dimmer Control (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
Windshield Wiper Operation
1 — Push End Of Lever And Hold For Front Washer
2 — Rotate Downward For Mist
3 — Rotate For Rear Wiper/Washer Operation
4 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward
the steering wheel) and hold. If the lever is pushed
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on
and operate for several cycles after the end of the lever
is released, and then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected.
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in
the off position, the wipers will operate for several
cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the washer will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
switch is released the washer will resume normal
operation.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Mist
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the MIST posi-
tion and release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
shield. The washer function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
page 269.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield
and automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end
of the multifunction lever to one of four detent positions
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
sensitive.
Setting three is preferred by the average driver during
normal rain conditions.
NOTE:
•
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
•
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the
windshield.
•
Use of products containing wax or silicone may
reduce Rain Sensing performance.
•
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect system
page 135.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for
the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under
the following conditions:
•
Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first placed in the ON position, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper switch is
moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than
32°F (0°C).
•
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the igni-
tion is in the ON position, and the gear selector is in
NEUTRAL, the Rain Sensing system will not operate
until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is
moved out of NEUTRAL.
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the mul-
tifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
located at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward
to the first detent for intermittent operation
and to the second detent for continuous rear
wiper operation.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward
to the third detent to activate the washer.
The washer will continue to operate as long
as the switch is held.
Rotate the center portion downward from the OFF posi-
tion to activate the rear washer. The washer will con-
tinue to operate as long as the switch is held.
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
switch is released the pump will resume normal
operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is placed
in the OFF position, the wiper will automatically return
to the “park” position.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the
radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
DESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Max A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on
the touchscreen to change the current set-
ting to the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.
Pressing this button or function again will cause the
MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the
MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other set-
tings will cause the MAX A/C to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen to change the current setting. The
A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin.
NOTE:
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if
needed. If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumu-
lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from the front of the radiator and through the
condenser.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the
system between recirculation mode and out-
side air mode. The Recirculation indicator
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be
used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be
used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen grayed out) if conditions
exist that could create fogging on the inside of the wind-
shield. The A/C can be deselected manually without
disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use
of Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode is not recommended. Recirculation mode may
automatically adjust to optimize customer experience
for warming, cooling, dehumidification, etc.
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display Temperature
Controls
Uconnect 4 With 8.4-inch Display Temperature Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
AUTO Button
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen, or push the button on the faceplate,
to change the current setting. The AUTO but-
ton automatically controls the interior cabin
temperature by adjusting distribution and amount of
airflow. Air Conditioning (A/C) may be active during
AUTO operation to improve performance. Performing
this function will cause the system to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. AUTO mode is
highly recommended for efficiency
page 52.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen button,
or push and release the button on the face-
plate, to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator
illuminates when the Front Defrost is on. Air comes
from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level
may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum tem-
perature settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. When toggling the Front
Defrost mode button, the climate system will return to
the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the touch-
screen, or push and release the button on
the faceplate, to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and
a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Driver And Passenger Temperature
Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push the Up button on the faceplate or press
and slide the temperature bar towards the
red arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings.
Push the Down button on the faceplate or
press and slide the temperature bar towards
the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen
to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC
is used to synchronize the front passenger
temperature and rear passenger temperature, mode,
and blower settings with the driver temperature, mode,
and blower settings. Changing the front passenger tem-
perature or rear passenger temperature, mode, and
blower settings while in SYNC will automatically exit this
feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower will
cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected using either the blower
control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the
touchscreen.
•
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn
the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you
turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
•
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce
the blower setting and the large blower icon to
increase the blower setting. Blower speed can also
be selected by pressing the blower bar area
between the icons.
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing the Mode button on
the faceplate, or one of the Mode buttons on
the touchscreen to change the airflow distri-
bution mode. The airflow distribution mode
can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard
outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to
regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side win-
dow demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the
Climate Control ON/OFF.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front ATC Panel
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
•
Press the Rear Climate button on the touchscreen to
display the rear climate controls. The control func-
tions now operate the rear system.
•
Press the Front Climate button on the touchscreen
to return to the front climate controls.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL BUTTON
Press and release this button to access the
rear climate controls. The Rear Climate indi-
cator will illuminate when the rear climate
controls are ON.
Front ATC Panel Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch
Display Rear Controls
Front ATC Panel Uconnect 4 With 8.4-inch Display Rear
Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
REAR AUTO BUTTON
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen to change the current setting. The
REAR AUTO indicator will illuminate when
REAR AUTO is on. This feature automatically
controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjust-
ing airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this func-
tion will cause the rear system to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes
page 52.
REAR LOCK BUTTON
Press and release this button to lock out the
rear manual temperature controls from
adjusting the rear temperature and blower
settings. The LOCK REAR indicator will illumi-
nate when LOCK REAR is on. Press and release this
button again to exit the feature.
FRONT CLIMATE BUTTON
Press and release to return to the Front Cli-
mate Control Screen.
SYNC BUTTON
Press the SYNC (or SYNC To Driver) button
on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC fea-
ture on/off. The SYNC indicator will illumi-
nate when SYNC is on. SYNC is used to syn-
chronize the front passenger temperature and rear
passenger temperature, mode, and blower settings with
the driver temperature, mode, and blower settings.
Changing the front passenger temperature or rear pas-
senger temperature, mode, or blower settings while in
SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
Rear Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the rear cli-
mate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. The speeds can be selected using
the buttons on the touchscreen. Use the small blower
icon (or blower icon with the downward arrow) to reduce
the blower setting, and the large blower icon (or blower
icon with the upward arrow) to increase the blower set-
ting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower
bar area between the icons.
REAR MODE CONTROL
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
buttons on the touchscreen to change the
airflow distribution mode. The rear airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the headliner outlets, the floor outlets or
both.
HEADLINER MODE
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner.
Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the
air vanes of the outlets to one side shuts off
the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level
Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air comes from both
the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is
designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner out-
lets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Floor
Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes from the
floor outlets.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL OFF BUTTON
To manually set the rear blower controls to
off, press the Rear Climate Control/Blower
Off button.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control —
If Equipped
The rear system temperature controls are located on
the headliner over the second row seating area.
Rear Automatic Climate Controls
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear
right side of the third row seats and overhead outlets at
each outboard rear seating position. The system pro-
vides heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehu-
midified air through the headliner outlets.
AUTO BUTTON
Turn the blower knob to the AUTO setting.
This feature automatically controls the rear
interior cabin temperature by adjusting air-
flow distribution and amount. Changing the
blower knob to any other blower setting will cause the
rear system to switch to manual mode
page 52.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Turn the rear temperature knob to adjust the
temperature.
Turn the knob to the right (clockwise) to raise
the temperature.
Turn the knob to the left (counterclockwise)
to lower the temperature.
The rear temperature setting is displayed in the control
head.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
Turn the rear blower knob to regulate the
amount of air forced through the system in
any mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the knob clockwise
from the off position. The rear blower setting is dis-
played in the control head.
REAR MODE CONTROL
Turn the rear mode knob to adjust airflow
distribution. The rear mode settings are dis-
played in the control head. The rear airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the headliner outlets, the floor outlets, or
both.
HEADLINER MODE
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner.
Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the
air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut
off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Air comes from both the headliner outlets
and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is
designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner out-
lets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Air comes from the floor outlets.
REAR TEMPERATURE LOCK
The Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the
control head is illuminated when the rear
controls are locked by the front system.
Rear Lock
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
Uconnect touchscreen, illuminates a lock symbol in the
rear display. The rear temperature and air source are
controlled from the front Uconnect system.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear
ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is
turned off.
The rear ATC is located in the headliner, near the center
of the vehicle.
•
Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
Uconnect touchscreen. This turns off the Rear Tem-
perature Lock icon in the rear temperature knob.
•
Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort
needs.
•
ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC Sys-
tem will automatically achieve and maintain that com-
fort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE
CONTROL (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front Automatic Tem-
perature Control (ATC) Panel and the word “AUTO”
will illuminate in the front ATC display, along with two
temperatures for the driver and front passenger. The
system will then automatically regulate the amount
of airflow.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain, by adjusting the driver, passenger, and
rear temperatures. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it
is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as
possible.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by
changing the front blower knob setting.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual over-
ride features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display
will be turned off when the system is being used in the
manual mode.
NOTE:
The system will not automatically sense the presence of
fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must
be manually selected to clear the windshield and side
glass.
CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep every-
one comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say one of the following commands:
•
“ Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
•
“ Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated
seats or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control system through an intake grille, located in the
right side trim panel behind the third row seats. The
heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel,
just behind the passenger second row door. Do not
(Continued)
CAUTION!
block or place objects directly in front of the inlet
grille or heater outlets. The electrical system could
overload causing damage to the blower motor.
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for sug-
gested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheat-
ing. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is
recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is func-
tioning properly and the proper amount, type, and con-
centration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recom-
mended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control sys-
tem when the vehicle is being stored for an extended
period of time, see
page 298.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves.
Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
and if they enter the air distribution box, they could plug
the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service
your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when
needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot
Weather
And Vehicle
Interior Is
Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel
Mode),
(A/C) on, and blower on
high. Roll down the windows for a min-
ute to flush out the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to achieve comfort.
Warm
Weather
Turn
(A/C) on and set the mode
control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny Operate in
(Bi-Level Mode).
Cool &
Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Mix
Mode) and turn
(A/C) on to keep
windows clear.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Cold
Weather
Set the mode control to (Floor
Mode). If windshield fogging starts to
occur, move the control to
(Mix
Mode).
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger
side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
Front Center Console
The front center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area.
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward
on the small latch located on the lid.
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
lower storage compartment.
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is provided
for the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage
compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push
the push cover on the door to open. Push the push
cover on the door to close.
Glove Compartment
Storage Compartment Latches
1 — Upper Storage Compartment Latch
2 — Lower Storage Compartment Latch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped
The rear full center console contains both an upper and
a lower storage area.
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward
on the small latch located on the front of the lid.
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
lower storage compartment.
NOTE:
Lower storage compartment light is always on with igni-
tion in the ON/RUN position.
The upper storage compartment may also be lifted for-
ward. Push in the release button located on the back of
the lid.
CAUTION!
Remove any items stored in the console cupholders
or devices with cords routing through upper storage
area. Damage may occur to upper console lid and
device cables when upper storage compartment is
lifted forward.
When lifted forward, there is access to the lower stor-
age compartment.
Sunglasses Bin Door
Storage Compartment
Storage Compartment Latches
1 — Upper Storage Compartment Latch
2 — Lower Storage Compartment Latch
Storage Compartment Rear Push Button
Lower Storage Compartment
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
When the lower storage compartment is accessed, it
allows the armrest to flip forward for Fold-Flat mode.
Fold-Flat mode allows the console armrest to be low-
ered below the Fold-Flat seat plane and protects the
armrest vinyl from damage when using the vehicle to
haul cargo.
Open storage areas, or cubby bins with removable lin-
ers, are located rearward of the cupholders and in the
lower front of the console.
Rear Mini Center Console — If Equipped
An open storage area, or cubby bin with removable
liner, is located in the front of the console.
USB/AUX CONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features,
if equipped. For further information, refer to “Android
Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
Connecting The AUX Audio Input Or
External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an external USB
device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port which is
located in the center console.
The USB ports on the media hub are equipped with a
Smart Electronic Voltage Regulator (Smart Charge) fea-
ture. This feature allows a device to charge for up to
one hour after the vehicle is powered off.
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized
to the vehicle’s USB control system (an external USB
device may take a few minutes to connect), the audio
device starts charging and is ready for use.
Once a device is connected to the USB port, it will begin
charging and is ready for use with the system. Type C
and Type A charge-only USB ports can be used at the
same time but cannot be used simultaneously while
playing media. When both Type C and Type A charge-
only USB ports are in use they will be charged at a
reduced rate.
NOTE:
If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it
may not communicate with the USB control system until
a minimum charge is attained. Leaving the audio device
connected to the USB control system may charge it to
the required level.
Fold-Flat Mode
Console Cubby Bins
Console Cubby Bin
Integrated Center Console USB/AUX Media HUB
1 — Mini-USB Type C Port
2 — Standard USB Type A Port
3—AUXPort
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
Using This Feature
By using an external USB device to connect to the USB
port:
•
The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s
sound system, providing metadata (artist, track title,
album, etc.) information on the radio display.
NOTE:
Depending on track configuration, track information
may not be present on the radio display.
•
The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the contents.
•
The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device).
NOTE:
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
Second Row USB Charging Port
Second Row USB Charging ports can be used for charg-
ing purposes only. Use the connection cable to connect
an external USB device to the vehicle’s USB charging
ports which are located either on the rear of the front
center console and/or in the second row center
console.
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen
that the device is not supported by the system.
LIGHTED CUPHOLDERS —
IF EQUIPPED
On some vehicles, the front cupholders are equipped
with a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the
front passengers.
The rear cupholders may also be equipped with a light
ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear passen-
gers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer Control
page 45.
Rear Center Console USB Ports
Second Row Center Console USB Port
Light Ring In Front Cupholder
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones,
small electronics and other low powered electrical
accessories. The power outlets are labeled with either a
“key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is
powered. Power outlets labeled with a key symbol are
powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC
position, while the outlets labeled with a battery symbol
are connected directly to the battery, and are powered
at all times.
NOTE:
•
All accessories connected to the battery powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
•
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 W
(13Amp)at12Volt.Ifthe160W(13Amp)power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system
needs to be replaced.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets
as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located to the right of the cli-
mate controls.
In addition to the front power outlet, there may also be
a power outlet located in the storage area of the center
console.
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear full center con-
sole, there is also a power outlet located in the lower
storage area of the rear full center console.
The rear cargo power outlet is located in the right rear
cargo area.
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
Front Power Outlet
Front Center Console Outlet — If Equipped
Rear Full Center Console Outlet
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
NOTE:
The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to battery
powered at all times by switching the power outlet right
rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel from fuse
location F90 to F91.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an elec-
tric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the gen-
erator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 W inverter outlet located on
the back of the center console to convert DC current to
AC current. This outlet can power cellular phones, elec-
tronics and other low power devices requiring power up
to 150 W. Certain video game consoles exceed this
power limit, as will most power tools.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
Rear Cargo Power Outlet Fuse
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear
Quarter Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument
Panel
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 W is exceeded,
the power inverter automatically shuts down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overload-
ing the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical
devices prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an elec-
tric shock and failure.
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi® wire-
less charging pad located below the center stack,
within the storage compartment. This charging pad is
designed to wirelessly charge your Qi® enabled mobile
phone. Qi® is a standard that allows wireless charging
of your mobile phone.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi® wireless
charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi® wireless
charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve or a spe-
cialized back plate can be purchased from your mobile
phone provider or a local electronics retailer. Please
see your phone’s Owner’s Manual for further
information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip
mat to hold your mobile phone in place, and an LED
indicator light.
Place the device inside the prepared area delimited in
the mat as shown in the image. Incorrect positioning
will prevent the phone from charging.
LED Indicator Status:
•
No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a
device. Device may not be compatible with the Qi®
standard.
•
Blue Light: Device is detected and is charging.
•
Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign object
is detected.
•
Green Light: Device has completed battery charging
(if device is equipped to transmit this information).
Important Notes Regarding This Vehicle’s Wireless
Charging Pad:
•
The presence of the Near-Field Communication
(NFC) function active on a smartphone could signal
malfunction anomalies.
•
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position in
order for the phone to charge.
•
To avoid interference with the key fob search, the
wireless charging pad will stop charging when any
door or liftgate is opened, even if the engine is
running.
•
Be sure to place the mobile device correctly (display
facing upward, and phone not covering the LED) on
the wireless charging pad.
•
If the phone moves on the pad causing the red light
to illuminate, the phone will have to be picked up
and placed back on the charging pad to resume
charging.
•
Wireless charging is not as fast as when the phone
is connected to a wired charger.
•
The phone’s protective case must be removed when
placed on the wireless charging pad.
Power Inverter
Wireless Charging Pad
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
•
iPhone® 12 (including iPod®) is equipped with soft-
ware to protect the device from overheating. When
the software is active, the rate of charge is slowed
down to protect the device.
•
Phones must always be placed on the wireless
charging pad within the outline shown on the pad so
that its charging parts connect with the charging
coils of the system. Movement of the phone during
charging may prevent or slow the rate of charge.
•
Having multiple applications open on the phone
while charging will reduce the charging efficiency,
and may even shut down an application that is
actively running (i.e. Apple CarPlay®). This may also
cause the phone to overheat.
•
Wireless chargers may implement certain methods
to prevent the phone from overheating during charg-
ing such as slowing down the rate of charge. In cer-
tain instances, the device may shut down for a brief
period of time (when the device reaches a certain
temperature). If this happens, it does not mean
there is a fault with the wireless charging pad. This
may just be a protective measure to prevent dam-
age to the phone.
•
The use of multiple wireless functions at the same
time (wireless charging, Apple CarPlay®, Android
Auto™) could cause the device to overheat, resulting
in limitation of the functions or it turning off. In this
case, it is recommended to connect the system
using the USB port.
•
Do not place the key fob or any other type of metal/
magnetized object inside the mobile phone housing
or near the wireless charging pad.
•
With a compatible device placed on the charging
pad, and the ignition is cycled to the OFF position, a
reminder message may appear on the instrument
cluster display to warn the driver.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the charging pad
or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. Doing so can cause
excessive heat buildup and damage to the fob. Plac-
ing the fob in close proximity of the charging pad
blocks the fob from being detected by the vehicle and
prevents the vehicle from starting.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
The power window controls are located on the driver's
door trim panel.
The passenger door windows can also be operated by
using the single window controls on the passenger door
trim panel. The window controls will operate only when
the ignition is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
To open the window part way (manually), push the
switch to the first detent and release it when you want
the window to stop.
The power window controls remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition has been placed in the
OFF position. Opening a vehicle front door will cancel
this feature.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition
of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
Automatic Window Features
Auto-Down Feature
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
down automatically.
To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch
in either the up or down direction and release the
switch.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — Driver
And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up
automatically.
Power Window Switches
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto-Up, it
will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove
the obstacle and use the window switch again to close
the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the
auto reverse function unexpectedly during Auto-Up. If
this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent
and hold it to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two sec-
onds after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button. To enable
the window controls, push and release the window lock-
out button again.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof/Power Sliding Top
(if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions.
This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If
the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open
the front and rear windows together to minimize the
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or
open any window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
•
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
Power Window Lockout Switch
Power Sunroof Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
WARNING!
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
SUNROOF
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second; the sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
cally and stop at full open position.
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from
any position.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunshade switch will stop the shade.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the switch rearward; the sunroof and
sunshade will open and automatically stop at full open
position.
Push and hold the switch forward and the sunroof will
close from any position and stop at a full closed
position.
Any release of the switch during open or close opera-
tion will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof will
remain in a partially opened position until the switch is
operated and held again.
Venting The Sunroof
Push and release the Vent button within one-half sec-
ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
is called Express Vent, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
SUNSHADE OPERATION
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of
the sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the sunroof is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the top’s path before closing.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear
out any debris that may have collected in the tracks.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
•
The power sunroof switch can remain active in
Accessory Delay for up to approximately 10 minutes
after the vehicle’s ignition is placed to the OFF posi-
tion. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
•
This feature is programmable using the Uconnect
system
page 135.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located underneath the driv-
er’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Reach under the hood from outside the vehicle,
move the safety latch to the left and lift the hood.
NOTE:
•
Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector
must be in PARK.
•
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms
are not in motion and not in the lifted position.
•
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
•
You may have to push down slightly on the hood
before pushing the safety latch.
CAUTION!
Be sure to disengage the rod and secure it in closed
position before closing the hood. Damage may occur.
CLOSING THE HOOD
In one continuous motion, pull down on the front edge
of the hood with moderate force until the angle is below
the crossover point (where the gas props are no longer
resisting) and let the hood continue to fall closed from
its own inertia.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage:
•
Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod
is fully seated into its storage retaining clips.
•
Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm down-
ward push at the center front edge of the hood to
ensure that both latches engage. Never drive your
vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both
latches engaged.
LIFTGATE
POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened by push-
ing the liftgate release handle
page 21
or by pushing the liftgate button on the key
fob. Push the liftgate button on the key fob
twice within five seconds to open or close the power
liftgate.
NOTE:
•
When using the liftgate button on the key fob to
open the liftgate while the vehicle is locked, only the
liftgate will unlock leaving the other doors to remain
locked. Closing the liftgate will not relock the lift-
gate. The lock button on the key fob, or the Passive
Entry lock button must be pushed to relock.
•
If the electronic liftgate handle is used to open the
liftgate and all the doors unlock, the liftgate and
vehicle doors must be locked again. Use the key fob,
Passive Entry lock button, or the power door lock
switches on the front door panels.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pushing the liftgate button located on the front over-
head console. If the liftgate is fully open, it can be
closed by pushing the liftgate button located on the left
rear trim panel. If the liftgate is in motion, pushing the
button again will reverse the liftgate.
When the liftgate button on the key fob is pushed two
times, the turn signals will flash to signal that the lift-
gate is opening or closing (if Flash Lamps with Lock is
enabled in the Uconnect settings), and the liftgate
chime will be audible. The chime can be turned on or
off through the Uconnect Settings
page 135.
Safety Latch Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
NOTE:
•
In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate,
an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to
open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch
release can be accessed through a snap-in cover
located on the liftgate trim panel.
•
If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
power liftgate functionality.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
•
The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
•
The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above
150°F (65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of
snow or ice from the liftgate before pushing any of
the power liftgate switches.
•
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position. After multiple
obstructions in the same cycle, the liftgate will auto-
matically stop and must be opened or closed
manually.
•
There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of
the liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open
position.
•
If the liftgate is only partially open, push the liftgate
button on the key fob twice to operate the liftgate.
•
If the liftgate release handle is pushed while the
power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will dis-
engage to allow manual operation.
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Storage
There is a removable storage bin located on the left
side of the rear cargo area.
Additional storage can be found in the load floor. To
access the lower storage, lift the handle and raise the
storage lid.
Retractable Cargo Area Cover —
If Equipped
The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to secure
loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect
passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grab the cover at the center handle, and pull it over
the cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the
slots in the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
Load Floor Handle
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-
ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle
is moving.
WARNING!
•
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a
tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat
to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
•
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying pur-
poses only, not for passengers, who should sit in
seats and use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han-
dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
•
Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
•
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
•
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
vehicle to sway.
•
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become
a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always
be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack.
Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does
not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
Tie-Down Hooks
Roof Rack
1—SideRail
2 — Crossbar
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
DEPLOYING THE CROSSBARS
1. Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the
thumb screws at both ends of the crossbar.
NOTE:
The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
2. Remove the crossbar from the stowed position by
sliding the crossbar towards the center of the roof.
Repeat with the crossbar on the opposite side.
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars
to prevent damage to the vehicle.
3. Starting with one crossbar, bend down the pivot sup-
ports at each end.
4. Position the crossbars across the roof making sure
the letters on the crossbars align with the matching
letters on the side rail.
5.
Slide the crossbar into the deploy position by moving it
towards the matching letter in the side rail. Be sure
the crossbar is fully deployed with the crossbar pushed
as far into the slot as possible. Once the crossbar is in
place, tighten both thumb screws completely.
Thumb Screw
Removing Crossbars
Bending Pivot
Positioning Crossbars
Installing Crossbars
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete
the deployment of the crossbars.
STOWING THE CROSSBARS
1. Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the
thumb screws at both ends. Slide the crossbar away
from the matching letter to remove it from the
deployed position. Repeat with the other crossbar.
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars
to prevent damage to the vehicle.
2. Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot
supports at each end.
3. Position the crossbar along the correct side rail.
Make sure the letters on the crossbar align with the
matching letters on the side rail.
4. Slide the crossbar outward, away from the center of
the roof. The crossbar will nest fully within the side
rail.
5. Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten
the thumb screws completely.
6. Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar
on the opposite side.
Deployed Crossbars
Crossbar Pivot
Stowing Crossbars
Crossbar To Side Rail
Tightening Crossbar
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
NOTE:
•
To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
•
If any metallic object is placed over the satellite
radio antenna (if equipped), you may experience
interruption of satellite radio reception.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
•
To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on
the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the
roof, place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.
•
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load
appropriately.
•
Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratchet-
ing mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the
straps and thumb wheels frequently to be sure
that the load remains securely attached.
•
Long loads that extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front
and rear of the vehicle.
•
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care-
fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
•
The use of Sport Mode, Track Mode, or Launch
Control is not recommended when using the Roof
Luggage Rack to carry a load.
Stowed Crossbars
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
69
3
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
○
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Speedometer
○
Indicates vehicle speed.
3. Temperature Gauge
○
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the engine cooling system
is operating satisfactorily.
○
The pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or oth-
ers could be badly burned by steam or boiling cool-
ant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats
page 272.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
4. Instrument Cluster Display
○
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display
page 72.
5. Fuel Gauge
○
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in
the ON/RUN position.
○
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located
page 120.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when
the ignition is first cycled.
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SRT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 71
3
SRT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
○
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Tachometer
○
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
3. Temperature Gauge
○
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within 203°F - 230°F
(95°C - 110°C) indicates that the engine cool-
ing system is operating satisfactorily.
○
The pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or oth-
ers could be badly burned by steam or boiling cool-
ant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats
page 272.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
greater than 230°F (110°C) pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
(Continued)
CAUTION!
turned off until the pointer drops back into the nor-
mal range. If the pointer remains above 230°F
(110°C), turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
4. Instrument Cluster Display
○
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display
page 72.
5. Fuel Gauge
○
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in
the ON/RUN position.
○
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when
the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster dis-
play, which offers useful information to the driver.
Opening/closing of a door will activate the display for
viewing, and display the total miles, or kilometers, in
the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is
designed to display important information about your
vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver interac-
tive display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show how systems are
working and give you warnings when they are not. The
steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll
through the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments.
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display is located in the center
of the instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
•
Left Arrow Button
Push the left
arrow button to return to the main
menu from an info screen or submenu item.
•
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up
arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu.
•
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right
arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu screens
of a main menu item.
•
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down
arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu.
•
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the informa-
tion screens or submenu screens of a main menu
item. Push and hold the OK button for one second
to reset displayed/selected features that can be
reset.
The instrument cluster display is located in the center
portion of the cluster and consist of multiple sections:
•
Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will illu-
minate in gray under normal conditions, yellow for
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and
white for on demand information.
•
Submenu Dots — Whenever there are submenus
available, the position within the submenus is
shown here.
•
Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
•
Gear Selector Status (PRND)
•
Driver Interactive Display (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current
Fuel Economy, Time, Trailer Trip and Gain)
•
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Status — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display will normally display the
main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the
main menu. The main display area also displays pop-up
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible
warning or information messages. These pop-up mes-
sages fall into several categories:
•
Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous
screen. Most of the messages of this type are then
stored (as long as the condition that activated it
remains active) and can be reviewed from the “Mes-
sages” main menu item. Examples of this message
type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” and
“Low Tire Pressure.”
•
Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until
the condition that activated the message is cleared.
Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal On”
(if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver
leaves the vehicle with the lights on).
•
Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote
Start feature. This message type is displayed until
the ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this
message type are “Remote Start Canceled - Door
Ajar” and “Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to
Start.”
•
Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous
screen. An example of this message type is “Auto-
matic High Beams On.”
ENGINE OIL LIFE RESET
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine
oil change indicator system. The “Oil
Change Required” message will display
in the instrument cluster display for five seconds after a
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
Scan me
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 73
3
single chime has sounded, to indicate the next sched-
uled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator
system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK or arrow buttons. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
refer to the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Ignition
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display con-
trols for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the down
arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to “Vehicle
Info.”
3. Push and release the right
arrow button to
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life. If con-
ditions are met, the gauge and numeric display will
update to show 100%. If conditions are not met a
pop-up message of “To reset oil life engine must be
off with ignition in run” will be displayed (for five
seconds), and the user will remain at the Oil Life
screen.
5. Push and release the up
or down arrow but-
ton to exit the submenu screen.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
DISPLAY AND MESSAGES
Includes the following, but not limited to:
Front Seat Belts Unbuckled Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
Traction Control Off Washer Fluid Low Oil Pressure Low
Oil Change Due Fuel Low Service Anti-lock Brake System
Service Electronic Throttle Control Service Power Steering Cruise Off
Cruise Ready ACC Override Cruise Set To XXX mph or km/h
Service Shifter Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) Service Tire Pressure System
Park Brake Engaged Brake Fluid Low Engine Temperature Hot
Lights On Right Front Turn Signal Light Out Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out Ignition or Accessory On
Vehicle Not In Park Remote Start Active Push Start Button Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low
Remote Start Canceled Door Open Remote Start Canceled Hood Open Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open
Remote Start Canceled Time Expired Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset Service Air Bag System
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service Air Bag Warning Light Door Open Liftgate Open
Hood Open Shift Not Allowed Vehicle Speed Too High To Shift to D
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to R Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P Service Transmission
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white or yellow telltales area on the left, and the green
or red telltales area on the right.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
MENU ITEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the
main menu items for several features. Use the up
and down arrow buttons to scroll through the
driver interactive display menu options until the desired
menu is reached.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the main gauge menu icon is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the left
or right arrow button to select the analog or digi-
tal type speedometer display. Push and release the OK
button to toggle units (mph or km/h) of the
speedometer.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push the left
or right
arrow button to scroll through the information
submenus.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
•
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle icon is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
the icon.
•
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire
To XX” is displayed with the vehicle icon and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the icon with the
pressure value of the low tire are displayed in a dif-
ferent color than the other tire pressure value.
•
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Ser-
vice Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire Pressure is an information only function, and can-
not be reset
page 204.
Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
•
Displays the current temperature of the coolant.
Transmission Temperature
•
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Oil Temperature
•
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
•
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Oil Life
•
Displays the current oil life of the vehicle.
Battery Voltage
•
Displays the current voltage level of the battery.
○ Storage Mode (SRT) — If Equipped
○ Through this option, the vehicle can be placed
into Storage mode.
Intake Air Temp (SRT) — If Equipped
•
Displays the current temperature of the air entering
the engine.
Engine Torque (SRT) — If Equipped
•
Displays the current engine torque.
Engine Power (SRT) — If Equipped
•
Displays the current engine power.
Air/Fuel Ratio (SRT 6.2L Only) — If Equipped
•
Displays the current air/fuel ratio.
Boost (SRT 6.2L Only) — If Equipped
•
Displays the current boost pressure.
Intercooler Coolant Temp (SRT 6.2L Only) —
If Equipped
•
Displays the current temperature of the coolant in
the intercooler.
Performance Features — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Performance Features icon/title is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the
left
or right arrow button to scroll through the
performance feature submenus.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75
3
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-
mance Features is intended for off-highway or track
use only and should not be done on any public road-
ways. It is recommended that these features be used
in a controlled environment and within the limits of
the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured
by the performance pages must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
The Performance Features include the following:
•
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) Timer
○ Best
○ Last
○ Current
•
0-100 mph (0-160 km/h) Timer
○ Best
○ Last
○ Current
○ Reaction Time — If Selected
•
0-60ft Duration
○ Best
○ Last
○ Current
○ Reaction Time — If Selected
•
1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer
○ Best
○ Last
○ Current
○ Reaction Time — If Selected
•
1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer
○ Best
○ Last
○ Current
○ Reaction Time — If Selected
•
Braking Distance
○ Distance
○ From Speed
•
Current G-Forces
•
Peak G-Forces
•
Lap Timer
•
Lap History
○ Will list the last four laps with the best lap high-
lighted in green.
•
Top Speed
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Driver Assist display icon/title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display then use the left
or
right
arrow button to choose adaptive cruise con-
trol or LaneSense
page 105.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy Menu icon/title is highlighted.
Push the left
or right arrow button to scroll the
submenus, one with current fuel economy display and
one without it.
•
Current MPG, L/100 km, or km/L
•
Average MPG, L/100 km, or km/L
•
Range to empty
•
Press the OK button to reset the average fuel
economy
NOTE:
The Range to empty feature is not able to be reset
through the instrument cluster display controls.
Trip
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display, then push and release the left
or
right
arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B.
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the
following:
•
Distance
•
Average Fuel Economy
•
Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down
arrow button on the steering wheel to
see the Stop/Start status in the driver inter-
active display
page 102.
Trailer Tow — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trailer Tow Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the left
or right arrow button to select Trailer Trip or
Trailer Brake.
Trailer Trip will display the following:
•
Distance
NOTE:
Press and hold the OK button to reset all the
information.
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trailer Brake will display the following:
•
Output
•
Type
•
Gain
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. This menu will display the
audio source information, including the Song name,
Artist name, and audio source with an accompanying
graphic.
Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu item is highlighted. This fea-
ture shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the left
or right arrow button will allow
you to see what the stored messages are.
When no messages are present, main menu icon will
be a closed envelope.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu icon/title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK
button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts
on the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is displayed in
the instrument cluster as well as the location that infor-
mation is displayed.
Upper Left or Upper Right
None Compass Outside Temp
Time Range To Empty
(RTE)
Fuel Economy
Average
Fuel Economy
Current
Trip A Trip B
Trailer Trip Gain
Current Gear
•
On
•
Off
Gear Display
•
Full
•
Single
Favorite Menus
Speedometer Driver Assist
(Show/Hide)
Stop/Start
Vehicle Info Fuel Economy
(Show/Hide)
Trailer Tow –
If Equipped
(Show/Hide)
Performance –
If Equipped
(Show/Hide)
Trip
(Show/Hide)
Audio
(Show/Hide)
Stored
Messages
Screen Setup
NOTE:
Menus with (show/hide) can push the OK button to
choose whether to show or hide this menu on the
instrument cluster display.
Defaults
•
Restore
•
Cancel
Diagnostics (SRT) — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Diagnostics icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK
button to display the diagnostic trouble codes and
descriptions. When the end of the list is reached, “No
or End of Diagnostic Code” will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Speed Warning (SRT) — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Speed Warning Menu icon/title is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to enter speed warning. Use the up
or
down
arrow button to select a desired speed, then
push and release the OK button to set the speed. When
the set speed is exceeded, the indication will light up
yellow and flash along with a pop-up message of
“Speed Warning Exceeded” with a continuous chime
(until the speed is no longer exceeded).
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY
SAVER MODE MESSAGE —
ELECTRICAL LOAD REDUCTION
ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sen-
sor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electri-
cal system and status of the vehicle battery.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 77
3
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure,
or the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, elec-
trical load reduction actions will take place to extend
the driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is
done by reducing power to or turning off non-essential
electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is run-
ning. It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due
to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the
current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge
at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
•
The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a diagnos-
tic on the charging system continuously.
•
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indi-
cate a problem with the charging system
page 79.
The electrical loads that may be switched off
(if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
•
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
•
Rear Defroster and Heated Mirrors
•
HVAC System
•
115 Volt AC Power Inverter System
•
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
the following conditions:
•
The charging system cannot deliver enough electri-
cal power to the vehicle system because the electri-
cal loads are larger than the capability of the charg-
ing system. The charging system is still functioning
properly.
•
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB
ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping, etc.).
•
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec-
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and simi-
lar devices.
•
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
•
The vehicle was parked for an extended period of
time (weeks, months).
•
The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
•
The battery was discharged by an electrical load left
on when the vehicle was parked.
•
The battery was used for an extended period with
the engine not running to supply radio, lights, char-
gers, +12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum
cleaners, game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
•
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
○ Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
○ Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB ports
○ Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
○ Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
•
Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories,
audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if
any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents).
•
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
•
The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips,
and if the evaluation and driving pattern of the
vehicle did not help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which
you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always
refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a
failure indication. All active telltales will display first if
applicable. The system check menu may appear differ-
ent based upon equipment options and current vehicle
status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver
or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When
the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light
will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passen-
ger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and
a chime will sound
page 207.
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected,
it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is
either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark
on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible
brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem
with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until
the condition has been corrected. If the problem is
related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run
when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake
system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a colli-
sion. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault
is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system. Con-
tact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79
3
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS system
page 102.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the
light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the trans-
mission is placed in the PARK (P) position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake ped-
als are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is run-
ning, immediate service is required and you may experi-
ence reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or
engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The
light will come on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during
starting, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant tem-
perature is too high, this indicator will illumi-
nate and a single chime will sound. If the
temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous
chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL
(N) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading
does not return to normal, turn the engine off immedi-
ately and call for service
page 248.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
hood is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the
engine as soon as possible, and contact an
authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the
engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the
hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the engine oil temperature is high. If the light
turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and
shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait
for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
Trailer Brake has been disconnected
page 125.
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Transmission Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This
may occur with strenuous usage such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the
vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with
the transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the
light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may con-
tinue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a
fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
system is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is
not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light
This warning light will indicate when the ESC
system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go
out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light
comes on continuously with the engine running, a mal-
function has been detected in the ESC system. If this
warning light remains on after several ignition cycles,
and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilome-
ters) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the prob-
lem diagnosed and corrected.
•
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator
Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
•
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on,
even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF indicator will be lit any time the Traction
Mode is set to Track or Full OFF in SRT Drive Modes.
Service LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and
requires service. Please see an authorized
dealer.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid
yellow when the vehicle is approaching a
lane marker. The warning light will flash
when the vehicle is crossing the lane marker
page 117.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81
3
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low
page 263.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
2 gal (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a
chime will sound. The light will remain on
until fuel is added.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnos-
tic System called OBD II that monitors
engine and automatic transmission control
systems. This warning light will illuminate when the igni-
tion is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition
switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The
vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions.
This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious
injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also could affect fuel economy and drive-
ability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
Service Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the Forward Collision Warning Sys-
tem. Contact an authorized dealer for ser-
vice
page 202.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the ACC is not
operating and needs service
page 105.
Service AWD Warning Light —
If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All-
Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. Contact
an authorized dealer.
Service Stop/Start System Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service.
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the Cruise Control System is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a mes-
sage is displayed to indicate that the tire
pressure is lower than the recommended
value and/or that slow pressure loss is
occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel
consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
previously, the display will show the indications corre-
sponding to each tire.
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the proper tire infla-
tion pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire fail-
ure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS mal-
function indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is rec-
ommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Low Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the AWD Low mode. The front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. AWD Low is designed for loose, slip-
pery road surfaces only
page 95.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off
page 202.
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD
power transfer case is in the NEUTRAL mode
and the front and rear driveshafts are disen-
gaged from the powertrain.
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
when Trailer Merge Assist has been acti-
vated
page 198.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83
3
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Indicator Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and the
vehicle in front is detected
page 105.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
Without Target Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and the
vehicle in front is not detected
page 105.
ECO Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ECO mode is
active.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is set to the desired speed
page 103.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates
solid green when both lane markings have
been detected and the system is armed and
ready to provide visual and torque warnings
if an unintentional lane departure occurs
page 117.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on
page 41.
Snow Mode Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when Snow mode is
active
page 97.
Sport Mode Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when Sport mode is
active
page 95.
Sport Mode Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when Sport mode is
active
page 184.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode
page 102.
Tow Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Tow mode is
active
page 97.
Track Mode Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when Track mode is
active
page 184.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash indepen-
dently and the corresponding exterior turn
signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ACC has been
turned on, but is not set
page 105.
Custom Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Custom mode
SRT is active
page 186.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is ready, but not set
page 103.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not
armed, the LaneSense indicator light illumi-
nates solid white. This occurs when only left,
right, or neither lane line has been detected.
If a single lane line is detected, the system is ready to
provide only visual warnings if an unintentional lane
departure occurs on the detected lane line
page 117.
SRT Speed Warning Indicator Light —
If Equipped
When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the
speed warning telltale will illuminate in the
instrument cluster with a number matching
the set speed. When the set speed is
exceeded, the indication will light up yellow and flash
along with a continuous chime. Speed Warning can be
turned on and off in the instrument cluster display
page 72.
The number “55” is only an example of a speed that
can be set.
Valet Mode SRT Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when Valet Mode is
active.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With
the low beams activated, push the multifunc-
tion lever forward (toward the front of the
vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunc-
tion lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull
the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on,
“flash to pass” scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and trans-
mission control systems. When these systems are oper-
ating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent perfor-
mance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions
well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II sys-
tem will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information
to assist your service technician in making repairs.
Although your vehicle will usually be driveable and not
need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause fur-
ther damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85
3
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a connec-
tion port to allow access to information related to the
performance of your emissions controls. Authorized
service technicians may need to access this informa-
tion to assist with the diagnosis and service of your
vehicle and emissions system
page 135.
WARNING!
•
ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
•
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
○ Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
○ Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal require-
ment to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass
could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is functioning and is not on when the engine is
running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be deter-
mined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail
the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things
will happen:
○
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not
ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
○
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you
can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replace-
ment, you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the previously men-
tioned test routine may then indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their
seat belts.
WARNING!
•
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a com-
plete stop, then shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and apply the parking brake.
•
Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in
the OFF position, key fob is removed from the
vehicle and vehicle is locked.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-
less Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The gear selector must be in the PARK (P) position
before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Do not shift from REVERSE (R), PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
engine is at idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK (P).
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP
button again.
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button. The igni-
tion will return to the OFF position.
2. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or
three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed
above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut
off. The ignition will remain in the ACC position until
the gear selector is in PARK and the button is
pushed twice to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h), the instrument clus-
ter will display a “ Vehicle Not In Park” message and
the engine will remain running. Never leave a
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine will shut off
and the ignition will remain in the ACC position. If
vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
vehicle may AutoPark. See AutoPark section for further
details.
87
4
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF, ACC, and
RUN. To change the ignition positions without starting
the vehicle and use the accessories, follow these
directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle.
Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if
both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure
is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning
message will display in the instrument cluster
page 72.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with plac-
ing the vehicle in PARK (P) if the following conditions
occur. It is a back-up system and should not be relied
upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
•
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not
blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster
display and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator
is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an
added precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
•
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
into PARK. It is a back-up system and should not
be relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
•
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
•
Vehicle is not in PARK
•
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
•
Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the engine
will turn off and the ignition switch will change to ACC
position. After 60 seconds, the ignition switches to OFF
automatically, unless the driver turns the ignition switch
OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
•
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
•
Vehicle is not in PARK
•
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
•
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
•
Driver’s door is ajar
•
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “ AutoPark Engaged Shift To P Then Shift
To Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed
in the instrument cluster. In these cases, the gear
selector must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “ Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To P”
will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle
speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle
speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A vehicle left
in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added pre-
caution, always apply the parking brake when exiting
the vehicle.
88 STARTING AND OPERATING
4WD Low — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle
in 4WD Low.
The message “ AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when both
of these conditions are met:
•
Vehicle is not in PARK
•
Driver’s door is ajar
The message “ AutoPark Not Engaged” will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will
continue until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the
driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument cluster
display and on the gear selector. As an added precau-
tion, always apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has
not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the bat-
tery to ensure a full battery charge during the crank
cycle.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place
the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 sec-
onds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
“Extended Park Starting” procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then
repeat the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank con-
tinuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait
10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure and the vehicle has not
experienced an extended park condition as defined
previously, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank
the engine for no more than 10 seconds. This should
clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
Leave the ignition key in the RUN position, release the
accelerator pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the con-
verter and vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-
erly
page 245.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(BELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use
of an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
— NON-SRT
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
STARTING AND OPERATING 89
4
Brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local
traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open
throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades see
page 305.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should
be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem. Please check your oil level
with the engine oil indicator often during the break-in
period. Add oil as required.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS –
SRT
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining optimum
performance and maximum durability for your new SRT
Vehicle.
This break-in occurs mainly during the first 500 miles
(805 km) and continues through the first oil change
interval.
It is recommended that the operator observe the follow-
ing driving behaviors during the new vehicle break-in
period:
0to100miles(0to161km):
•
Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an
extended period of time.
•
Press the accelerator pedal slowly and no more
than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
•
Avoid aggressive braking.
•
Drive with the engine speed below 3,500 RPM.
•
Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h)
and observe local speed limits.
100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):
•
Press the accelerator pedal slowly and no more
than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower
gears (FIRST to THIRD gears).
•
Avoid aggressive braking.
•
Drive with the engine speed below 5,000 RPM.
•
Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h)
and observe local speed limits.
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
•
Exercise the full engine RPM range, shifting manu-
ally (paddles or gear shift) at higher RPM when
possible.
•
Do not perform sustained operation with the accel-
erator pedal at wide open throttle.
•
Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h)
and observe local speed limits.
For the first 1,500 miles (2,414 km):
•
Do not participate in track events, sport driving
schools, or similar activities.
NOTE:
Check engine oil with every refueling and add if neces-
sary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher through
the first oil change interval. Running the engine with an
oil level below the add mark can cause severe engine
damage.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
PARK (P) position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
parking brake, firmly push the parking brake pedal fully.
To release the parking brake, press the parking brake
pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the
brake disengage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON/RUN position, the Brake Warning Light
in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
Parking Brake
90 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the Brake Warning Light will
flash if vehicle speed is detected. A chime will sound
if the vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) to alert
the driver. Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
•
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, other-
wise the load on the transmission locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of
PARK.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement
and possible injury or damage.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the OFF position, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the park-
ing brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting
out of PARK.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK (P) position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
•
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator sol-
idly indicates PARK without blinking. Ensure that
the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK
position is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
•
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL (N)
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 91
4
WARNING!
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
•
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE (R) only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
•
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE (D) when the engine is above idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK (P)
before the ignition can be turned to the OFF position.
This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the
vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK. This
system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever
the ignition is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission is locked in PARK when the ignition is
in the ACC position (engine will be off).
BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT
INTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds
the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal
must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be
pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
FUEL ECONOMY (ECO) MODE
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehi-
cle's overall fuel economy during normal driving condi-
tions. Push the ECO button in the center stack of the
instrument panel to enable or disable ECO mode. Or
ECO mode can be enabled or disabled through your
Uconnect system.
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) mode is enabled, the
vehicle control systems will change the following:
•
The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
later.
•
The overall driving performance will be more
conservative.
•
Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily
inhibited based on temperature and other factors.
8-SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear range is displayed both on the
gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a
gear range, push the lock button on the gear selector
and move the selector rearward or forward. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running
and the brake pedal must be pressed. You must also
press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE
or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at
low speeds. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
ECO OFF Button
92 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
The transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
and precision shifts will develop within a few hun-
dred miles (kilometers).
•
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selec-
tor position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects PARK while driving), the
position indicator will blink continuously until the
selector is returned to the proper position, or the
requested shift can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its
shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with envi-
ronmental and road conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal
when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL (AutoStick)
shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the
AutoStick shift control. Toggling the gear selector for-
ward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick)
position (beside the DRIVE position), or tapping the
paddle shifters (+/-) (if equipped) will manually select
the transmission gear, and will display the current gear
in the instrument cluster
page 95.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In MANUAL (AutoStick)
mode, the transmission gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc.). Move the gear selector to
the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting out of
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking
the transmission. The engine can be started in this
range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with the electronically shifted
transfer case, ensure that the transfer case is in AWD
AUTO or LOW RANGE position on the AWD Control
Switch. Ensure that the NEUTRAL position light is NOT
illuminated.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
•
Apply the parking brake.
•
Shift the transmission into PARK.
•
Turn the ignition OFF.
•
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Before moving the transmission gear selector out
of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear
selector could result.
•
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
Transmission Gear Selector
1 — Gear Selector
2 — Lock Button
STARTING AND OPERATING 93
4
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have properly engaged the transmission into the
PARK position:
•
When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on
the gear selector and firmly move the selector all
the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
•
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is
not blinking.
•
With brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with the engine running. Apply the park-
ing brake and shift the transmission into PARK (P) if you
must exit the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the igni-
tion to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing
page 130.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle
page 251.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift
control to select a lower gear
page 95. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
improves warm up time of the engine and transmission
to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the
torque converter clutch is inhibited until the transmis-
sion fluid is warm. Normal operation will resume once
the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
Manual (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE posi-
tion) enables full manual control of transmission shift-
ing (also known as AutoStick mode
page 95). Tog-
gling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while
in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position will manually select
the transmission gear, and will display the current gear
in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the trans-
mission may operate only in certain gears, or may not
shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely
degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations,
the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is
turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the instru-
ment cluster will inform the driver of the more serious
conditions, and indicate what actions may be
necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing
the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message indi-
cates the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at an authorized dealer):
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if possible. If
not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
94 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is
no longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend
that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest pos-
sible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmis-
sion. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
AutoStick — If Equipped
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This feature
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear selector (in the
MANUAL position), or the paddle shifters to the
MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE (D) position), or
tap one of the paddle shifters on the steering wheel.
Tapping the (-) paddle shifter to enter AutoStick mode
will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear,
while tapping (+) to enter AutoStick mode will retain the
current gear. The current transmission gear will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
The paddle shifters (if equipped) may be disabled using
the Uconnect Personal Settings.
AutoStick mode has the following operational benefits:
•
The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
•
The transmission will automatically downshift to
FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the
driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission
as the vehicle is accelerated.
•
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or SECOND
gear. Tapping (+) at a stop will allow starting in SEC-
OND gear. Starting out in SECOND gear can be help-
ful in snowy or icy conditions.
•
If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
•
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
•
Holding the (-) paddle pressed, or holding the gear
selector in the (-) position, will downshift the trans-
mission to the lowest gear possible at the current
speed.
•
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
•
The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector
to the DRIVE (D) position, or press and hold the (+)
paddle shifter until "D" is indicated in the instrument
cluster. You can shift in or out of AutoStick mode at any
time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a SPORT Mode feature.
The engine, transmission, and steering systems are all
set to their SPORT settings. SPORT Mode will provide
improved throttle response and modified transmission
shift points for an enhanced driving experience, as well
as greater amount of steering feel. This mode may be
activated and deactivated by pushing the SPORT button
on the instrument panel switch bank.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
SINGLE-SPEED OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS/PRECAUTIONS —
IF EQUIPPED
This system contains a single-speed (HI range only)
transfer case, which provides convenient full-time All-
Wheel Drive (AWD). No driver interaction is required.
The Brake Traction Control (BTC) System, which com-
bines standard ABS and Traction Control, provides
resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow addi-
tional torque transfer to wheels with traction.
STARTING AND OPERATING 95
4
NOTE:
This system is not appropriate for conditions where
AWD LOW is recommended
page 133.
ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED
TRANSFER CASE — IF EQUIPPED
This is an electronically shifted transfer case and it is
operated by the AWD control switch, which is located on
the center console.
This electronically shifted transfer case provides three
positions:
•
All-wheel drive auto range (AWD AUTO)
•
All-wheel drive low range (AWD LOW)
•
N (Neutral)
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
AWD LOW position can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accom-
plished by pushing the AWD LOW switch
page 97.
The AWD LOW position is designed for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Driving in the AWD LOW position on
dry, hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear
and damage to the driveline components.
Transfer Case Position Indicator
Messages
The Transfer Case Position Indicator message (AWD
LOW) is located in the instrument cluster and indicate
the current and desired transfer case selection
page 72. When you select a different transfer case
position, the position indicator lights will do the
following:
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn off.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until
the transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain on.
If shift conditions are not met, one or more of the fol-
lowing events may occur:
1. The indicator light for the current position will
remain on.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will con-
tinue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met
page 97.
The “SERV AWD” Warning Light monitors the electronic
shift all-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine start-up or illuminates during driving, it means
that the all-wheel drive system is not functioning prop-
erly and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SERV AWD” Warning Light is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or
rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to
driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in AWD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the AWD
AUTO position at a given road speed. Take care not to
overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of all-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to
the transfer case.
Because all-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
AWD Control Switch
96 STARTING AND OPERATING
For additional information on the appropriate use of
each transfer case position, see the following:
AWD LOW
All-Wheel Drive Low Range – This range provides low
speed all-wheel drive. Locks the front and rear drive-
shafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Additional traction and maxi-
mum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
N (Neutral)
This range disengages both the front and rear drive-
shafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle
page 130.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the park-
ing brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position dis-
engages both the front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
SHIFTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
•
If any of the requirements to select a new transfer
case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift. The position indicator light for the pre-
vious position will remain on and the newly selected
position indicator light will continue to flash until all
the requirements for the selected position have
been met. To retry a shift: return the control switch
back to the original position, make certain all shift
requirements have been met, wait five seconds and
try the shift again.
•
If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indica-
tor light will turn off, the selected position indicator
light will flash until the transfer case completes the
shift. When the shift is complete, the position indi-
cator light for the selected position will stop flashing
and remain on.
AWDAUTOToAWDLOW
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of AWD LOW some gear noise
may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimen-
tal to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either
of the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, push the AWD LOW control switch.
4. After the AWD LOW position indicator light is on (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the ignition in ON/RUN position and engine
running, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push the AWD LOW control switch.
4. After the AWD LOW position indicator light is on (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
•
If steps 1 or 2 of either the “Preferred” or “Alternate
Procedure” are not satisfied prior to attempting the
shift or if they no longer are being met while the
shift attempt is in process, the desired position indi-
cator light will flash continuously while the original
position indicator light is on, until all requirements
have been met.
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indica-
tor lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not
in the ON/RUN position, then the shift will not take
place and no position indicator lights will be on or
flashing.
N (Neutral) Shift Procedure
For information regarding the transfer case N (Neutral)
shift procedure
page 131.
TOW N GO — IF EQUIPPED
Tow N Go combines the capabilities of the vehicle con-
trol systems, along with driver input, to provide opti-
mum performance for road conditions.
Push any one of the four drive mode buttons to select
the desired mode.
STARTING AND OPERATING 97
4
Tow N Go consists of the following positions:
•
TRACK – Optimizes settings for transmission,
engine, driveline, and suspension in order to maxi-
mize vehicle performance. Also the electric power
steering offers more feedback of the tire gripping
the road. This feature will reset to AUTO upon an
ignition cycle. To turn off Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)
page 195.
•
SPORT – Dry weather, on-road calibration. Perfor-
mance based tuning that provides a rear-wheel
drive feel but with improved handling and accelera-
tion over a two-wheel drive vehicle. This feature will
reset to AUTO upon an ignition cycle.
•
TOW – TOW drive mode also optimizes the transmis-
sion shifting for towing, as well as maximizing
straight line traction by optimizing driveline settings
on AWD system. Use this mode for towing/hauling.
Vehicle suspension will go to SPORT mode. Trailer
Sway Control (TSC) is always enabled in all drive
modes provided that the ESC OFF indicator light is
not illuminated. TSC is disabled when the ESC OFF
lamp is illuminated. This feature will reset to AUTO
upon an ignition cycle.
•
SNOW – Tuning set for additional stability in inclem-
ent weather. Use on and off-road on loose traction
surfaces such as snow. This feature will reset to
AUTO upon an ignition cycle.
GUIDELINES FOR TRACK USE
NOTE:
The standard Black Brembo Brake Pads are not recom-
mended for track use. Only the Red Brembo Perfor-
mance SRT brake pads are appropriate for track use.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with Drive Modes, they
will alter the vehicle’s performance in various driv-
ing situations. It is recommended that your vehicle
operates in SPORT or TRACK modes during the track
event.
•
Prior to each track event, verify all fluids are at the
correct levels.
•
Prior to each track event, verify the front and rear
brake pads have more than half pad thickness
remaining. If the brake pads require changing, com-
plete a brake burnish procedure prior to track outing
at full pace.
NOTE:
Use of DOT 4 brake fluid is suggested for extended
track usage due to increased thermal capacity.
•
At the conclusion of each track event, it is recom-
mended that a brake bleed procedure is performed
to maintain the pedal feel and stopping capability of
your Brembo High Performance brake system.
•
It is recommended that each track outing should
end with a minimum of one cooldown lap using
minimal braking.
•
It is recommended to check oil temperature after
each track session. If the oil is still above 225°F
(107°C), do another cooldown lap if possible, or
keep the engine running and let idle until below
225°F (107°C), in order to prevent heat soaking of
the engine. Ensure temperature is reducing and do
not leave vehicle gauges unattended while idling
just after a track session.
•
It is recommended that the suspension system,
brake system, prop shaft, and half shaft boots be
checked for wear or damage after every track event.
•
Track usage results in increased operating tempera-
tures of the engine, transmission, driveline and
brake system. This may affect Noise Vibration
Harshness (NVH) countermeasures designed into
your vehicle. New components may need to be
installed to return the system to the original NVH
performance.
•
Tire pressure:
○ Recommended tire pressure of 33 psi (230 kPa)
when tires are cold, or below 42 psi (290 kPa)
when hot.
Drive Mode Buttons
1 — TRACK
2 — SPORT
3—TOW
4 — SNOW
98 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
It is recommended that you target below 42 psi
(290 kPa) when tires are hot at the conclusion of
each track session. Starting at 33 psi (230 kPa)
cold and adjusting based on ambient and track con-
ditions is recommended. Tire pressure can be moni-
tored via the instrument cluster display and can
assist with adjustments.
Track burnishing your brakes
To avoid “green lining fade” during track use, the brake
pads and rotors must have a thermal burnish for
factory-installed components or when new brake fric-
tion components are installed:
1. Use one track session to burnish brakes by driving
at 75% speed. Brake at approximately 0.60 - 0.80g
max without Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
intervention.
2. Complete one lap in this manner until you start
smelling the brakes. Continue for another half lap at
speed, then complete a two lap cooldown with mini-
mal brake applications. Ensure the brakes are not
smoking. If they are, complete another cooldown
lap.
3. Getting the brakes to smoke is an indication that the
brakes have overheated and may negatively affect
future track usage.
4. Allow vehicle to sit and cool for at least 30 minutes.
If an infrared thermal gun is available, allow rotors
to cool to 200°F (93.3°C) before returning to the
track.
5. There should be a thin layer of ash when inspecting
the brake pads. Having the ash layer go more than
half the thickness of the pad material is a sign of an
overly aggressive burnish.
6. Occasionally, a second burnish session is required.
If the brake pads begin to emit an odor during the
next track session, reduce vehicle speed and brak-
ing deceleration rate to burnish targets and follow
steps 2-4.
7. New brake pads installed on old rotors require a
burnish. New rotors installed with old brake pads
should be burnished at the track or driven for
300 miles (485 km) of city driving to develop an
adequate lining transfer layer on the rotor surface
prior to track use.
8. Rotors that pulsate during track use should be
replaced.
NOTE:
Resurfacing of the rotors is not recommended, as it
removes mass from the rotor, reducing its thermal
capacity. Resurfacing also thins the rotor cheek,
making it less robust and increasing the likelihood
of pulsation in further track use.
SELEC-TRACK — IF EQUIPPED
Description
Selec-Track combines the capabilities of the vehicle
control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
best performance for all terrains.
Push the SRT button and the available drive modes will
show up on the radio touchscreen.
Refer to the Drive Modes for further information.
Selec-Track consists of the following positions:
•
SPORT – Dry weather, on-road calibration. Perfor-
mance based tuning that provides a rear-wheel
drive feel but with improved handling and accelera-
tion over a two-wheel drive vehicle. This feature will
reset to AUTO upon an ignition cycle.
•
SNOW – Tuning set for additional stability in inclem-
ent weather. Use on and off-road on loose traction
surfaces such as snow. This feature will reset to
AUTO upon an ignition cycle.
•
AUTO – Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive
operation can be used on and off-road. Balances
traction with seamless steering feel to provide
improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel
drive vehicles.
Selec-Track Buttons
1—SRT
2 — LAUNCH
STARTING AND OPERATING 99
4
•
TRACK – Track road calibration for use on high trac-
tion surfaces. Driveline is maximized for traction.
Some binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces.
This feature will reset to AUTO upon an ignition
cycle.
•
TOW – Use for towing and hauling heavy loads.
Vehicle suspension will go to SPORT mode. Trailer
Sway Control (TSC) is enabled in the ESC system.
This feature will reset to AUTO upon an ignition
cycle.
CUSTOM
Pushing the SRT button twice will put the vehicle into
Custom mode. This will allow the driver to create a cus-
tom vehicle configuration that is saved for quick selec-
tion of favorite settings. The system will return to AUTO
mode when the ignition switch is cycled from RUN to
OFF to RUN, if this mode is selected. While in Custom
Mode the Stability, Transmission, Steering, Suspension,
all-wheel drive set up, and Paddle shifter settings may
be configured through the Custom mode set-up.
NOTE:
Refer to the Drive Mode Supplement for further
information.
ACTIVE DAMPING SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled
damping system. This system reduces body roll and
pitch in many driving situations including cornering,
acceleration and braking. There are 3 modes:
•
Street Mode (Available in terrain positions AUTO,
SNOW and CUSTOM.) — Used during highway
speeds where a touring suspension feel is desired.
•
Sport Mode (Available in terrain positions AUTO,
SPORT, CUSTOM and TOW.) — Provides a firm sus-
pension for better handling.
•
Track Mode (Available in terrain positions AUTO,
TRACK and CUSTOM.) — Provides a full firm suspen-
sion for an aggressive track experience.
Refer to the Drive Mode Supplement for further
information.
LAUNCH CONTROL
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system
that is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum
vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is
a form of traction control that manages tire slip while
launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use
during race events on a closed course where consistent
quarter mile and zero to sixty times are desired. The
system is not intended to compensate for lack of driver
experience or familiarity with the race track. Use of this
feature in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions
may result in excess wheel slip outside this systems
control resulting in an aborted launch.
Preconditions:
•
Launch Control should not be used on public roads.
Always check track conditions and the surrounding
area.
•
Launch Control is not available within the first
500 miles (805 km) of engine break-in.
•
Launch Control should only be used when the
engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
•
Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved
road surfaces only.
CAUTION!
Use on slippery or loose surfaces may cause damage
to vehicle components and is not recommended.
Launch Control is only available when the following pro-
cedure is followed:
NOTE:
Pushing the LAUNCH button on the instrument panel
will access Launch Control features. Please refer to the
Drive Mode Supplement for further information.
LAUNCH Button
1. Push the LAUNCH button on the instrument panel.
2. Press the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button on the
instrument cluster display. This screen will allow you
to adjust your launch RPM for optimum
launch/traction.
3. Press the "Activate Launch Control" button on the
instrument cluster display and follow the
instructions.
○
Make sure the vehicle is not moving
○
Put vehicle in Drive
○
Steering wheel must be pointing straight
○
Vehicle must be on level ground
○
Apply brake pressure
○
While holding the brake, rapidly apply and hold
the accelerator pedal to wide open throttle. The
engine speed will hold at the RPM that was set
in the “Launch RPM Set-up” screen
100 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Messages will appear in the instrument cluster dis-
play to inform the driver if one or more of the above
conditions have not been met.
4. When the above conditions have been met, the
instrument cluster display will read “Release Brake”.
5. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches
62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the Electronic Sta-
bility Control (ESC) system will return to its current ESC
mode.
Launch Control will abort before launch completion and
display a "Launch Aborted" message in the instrument
cluster when any of the following occur:
•
The accelerator pedal is released during launch.
•
The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer
moving in a straight line.
•
The ESC OFF button is pressed to change the sys-
tem to another mode.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels are
spinning and do not have traction. Damage to the
transmission may occur.
TORQUE RESERVE — IF EQUIPPED
Torque Reserve is automatically enabled in Brake
Torque Launch and Launch Control to reduce the time
required for the intake manifold to fill with air. Torque
Reserve opens the throttle delivering excess air. Torque
is controlled during this time by shutting fuel off to mul-
tiple cylinders and retarding spark as necessary, hold-
ing the potential torque in reserve. As soon as the driver
launches the car, fuel flow is restored and spark is
advanced to instantaneously deliver the reserve torque.
For a given launch engine speed, additional torque is
delivered more quickly than is possible with manual
control.
In Brake Torque Launch, the magnitude of reserve pro-
duced depends on the driver's pedal torque request. In
Launch Control, the reserve magnitude depends on the
engine launch speed selected in the Race Options
menu.
Due to the way the engine is controlled during Torque
Reserve, a distinct exhaust note is generated and
engine vibration increases.
Brake Torque Launch with Torque
Reserve
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Torque Launch
with Torque Reserve that is designed to allow the driver
to achieve maximum vehicle acceleration in a straight
line. This feature is intended for use during race events
on a closed course where consistent quarter mile (time)
and 0 to 60 (time) are desired. The Brake Torque
Launch with Torque Reserve feature is designed to
allow the driver to launch the vehicle with the benefit of
Torque Reserve, while maintaining control of the engine
speed during staging and the profile of the torque deliv-
ered when launching. This feature is intended for use
during race events on a closed course when additional
launch torque is desired. The system is not intended to
compensate for lack of driver experience or familiarity
with the race track. Use of this feature in low traction
(cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions may result in excess
wheel slip outside this system control resulting in an
aborted launch.
Initial Conditions:
•
Make sure the vehicle is not moving
•
Put vehicle in Drive
•
Steering wheel must be centered with tires pointing
forward
•
Vehicle must be on level ground
•
Vehicle at normal operating conditions
•
Launch Mode not active
•
Drive mode switch is in AUTO, SPORT, TRACK or
CUSTOM
○ In Custom mode, the All-Wheel Drive mode must
not be 50/50
•
Apply adequate brake pressure with left foot
•
Apply a steady throttle with the right foot to achieve
a desired engine speed above 1,350 RPM
•
To launch, remove left foot from brake pedal while
maintaining or increasing throttle to launch with
right foot
NOTE:
Brake Torque Launch will abort if the engine speed
drops below 1,000 RPM, throttle is released or 10 sec-
onds have elapsed while in Torque Reserve. Brake
Torque Launch is not recommended within the first
500 miles (805 km) of engine break-in.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels are
spinning and do not have traction. Damage to the
transmission may occur.
STARTING AND OPERATING 101
4
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L AND 6.4L
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine's eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full func-
tionality after a battery disconnect.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of maneuverabil-
ity. The power steering system adapts to different driv-
ing conditions and adjusts accordingly.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System
page 135.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is displayed
and the “Service Power Steering” or the “Power Steer-
ing Assist Off – Service System” message is displayed
within the instrument cluster display, this indicates the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service
page 78.
NOTE:
•
Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
•
If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer
for service.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “Power Steering
System Over Temp” message is displayed on the instru-
ment cluster screen, this indicates an over temperature
condition in the power steering system. Once driving
conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for
a few moments until the icon and message turn off.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is designed to reduce fuel con-
sumption. The system will stop the engine automatically
during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met.
Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator
pedal will automatically re-start the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine
parts, to handle the additional engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
customer engine start. At that time, the system will go
into STOP/START READY.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
Occur:
•
The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
section
page 72.
•
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
•
The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illumi-
nate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings
will be maintained upon return to an engine running
condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE
DOES NOT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/
Start system may be viewed in the instrument cluster
display Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations,
the engine will not stop:
•
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
•
Driver’s door is not closed.
•
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
•
Battery charge is low.
•
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
•
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
•
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
•
HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
102 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
•
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
•
Hood is open.
•
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
•
Accelerator pedal input.
•
Engine temperature is too high.
•
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been achieved
from previous Autostop.
•
Steering angle is beyond threshold.
•
ACC is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of
the items previously listed.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
AUTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the accelerator pedal is
pressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage
upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto-
matically While In Autostop Mode:
•
The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
•
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
•
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
•
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
•
Battery voltage drops too low.
•
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
•
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
•
Steering angle is beyond threshold.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE
STOP/START SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The
“STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display and the autostop mode will be dis-
abled
page 72.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the ON
mode every time the ignition is turned OFF and back
ON.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE
STOP/START SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “Service Stop/
Start System” message and a yellow Stop/Start telltale
will appear in the instrument cluster display
page 78.
If the “Service Stop/Start System” message appears in
the instrument cluster display, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
•
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
preset speed.
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
•
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled,
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the fea-
ture selected.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 103
4
•
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable,
and vice versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelera-
tor operations at speeds greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose con-
trol and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control.
“CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is on.
To turn the system off, push the on/off button a second
time. “CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is off.
The system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system
or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the sys-
tem OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a
speed has been set, a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET
TO MPH (km/h)” will appear indicating what speed was
set. A cruise indicator lamp, along with the set speed,
will also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster
when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed
by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
•
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result ina1mphspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 mph.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust until the button is released,
then the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result ina1km/hspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 km/h.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust until the button is released,
then the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to
pass as you would normally. When the pedal is
released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
Cruise Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accel
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
104 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without Cruise
Control.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose con-
trol and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button, or
normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Cruise Control system without erasing
the set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise
Control without erasing the set speed from memory:
•
Vehicle parking brake is applied
•
Stability event occurs
•
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
•
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the
OFF position will erase the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving con-
venience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
The Cruise Control function performs differently
page 103.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your Cruise Control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect
a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
•
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed
of the vehicle ahead.
•
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adap-
tive Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning
system.
•
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled) will
not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
aware of the feature selected
page 310.
WARNING!
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi-
tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure
(Continued)
WARNING!
safe operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
•
The ACC system:
○ Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
○ Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
○ Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
○ Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for two seconds in the stop position. If the target
vehicle does not start moving within two sec-
onds the ACC system will display a message that
the system will release the brakes and that the
brakes must be applied manually. An audible
chime will sound when the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
•
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
•
When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
4
WARNING!
•
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
•
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel
operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The information it displays depends on
ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
until one of the following appears in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instru-
ment cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
•
System Cancel
•
Driver Override
•
System Off
•
ACC Proximity Warning
•
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state,
the instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display
will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
•
When in 4WD Low
•
When the brakes are applied
•
When the parking brake is applied
•
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
•
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
speed range
•
When the brakes are overheated
•
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
•
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds
•
When there is a stationary vehicle in front of your
vehicle in close proximity
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time,
the system will turn off and the instrument cluster dis-
plays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
4 — Distance Decrease Button
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — RES/Resume
7 — SET (-)/Decel
8 — Distance Increase Button
106 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled. To change between the different modes, push
the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the
Fixed Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning
on (changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode (ACC not
enabled), the system will not react to vehicles ahead.
In addition, the proximity warning does not activate
and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to
the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the
vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always
be aware which mode is selected.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph
(32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
•
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond
the set speed. If this occurs, the message “DRIVER
OVERRIDE” will display in the instrument cluster
display.
•
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while ACC is enabled, the system will not be control-
ling the distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be deter-
mined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
•
The brake pedal is applied
•
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
•
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
•
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
•
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates
•
The vehicle parking brake is applied
•
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
•
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
•
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
•
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
•
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
•
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
•
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed
•
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
•
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and remove your foot from the accel-
erator pedal. The instrument cluster display will show
the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
•
While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop longer than two seconds, the system
will cancel. The driver will have to apply the brakes
to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
•
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
4
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by push-
ing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
•
Pushing the SET (+),orSET(-) button once will
result ina1mphspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 mph.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•
Pushing the SET (+),orSET(-) button once will
result ina1km/hspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 km/h.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until
the button is released. The new set speed is
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) button, the new set speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
When ACC Is Active:
•
When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
•
The ACC system applies the brake down to a full
stop when following the vehicle in front. If your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,
your vehicle will release the brakes two seconds
after coming to a full stop.
•
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change
on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshift-
ing may occur while climbing uphill or descending
downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to
maintain set speed. When driving uphill and down-
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking tem-
perature exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (lon-
gest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar
(short). Using this distance setting and the vehicle
speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting appears in the
instrument cluster display.
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain
the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in
the same lane, the instrument cluster display will show
the ACC Set With Target Detected Indicator Light. The
system will then adjust the vehicle speed automatically
to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
Distance Settings
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
108 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
•
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed.
•
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
•
The distance setting is changed.
•
The system disengages page 106.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC sys-
tem applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to main-
tain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE!” will flash in the instrument cluster display
and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display
is a warning for the driver to take action and does not
necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide
an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to
assist in passing the vehicle. This additional accelera-
tion is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal and will only be active when passing on the left
hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a vehicle ahead, your vehicle will
resume motion, without any driver interaction, if the
vehicle ahead starts moving within two seconds of your
vehicle coming to a standstill.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will
release. A cancel message will display on the instru-
ment cluster display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a stand-
still, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver
door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel
and the brakes will release. A cancel message will dis-
play on the instrument cluster display and produce a
warning chime. The driver must now manually operate
the vehicle’s accelerator and brakes.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and a chime will sound when condi-
tions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such
as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such
as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument clus-
ter display will display this message and the system will
deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels
with reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after
the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal
of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of
the vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is impor-
tant to note the following maintenance items:
•
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
•
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure
and require a sensor realignment.
•
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged
due to a collision, see an authorized dealer for
service.
•
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or aftermar-
ket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system fail-
ure or malfunction.
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
4
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
•
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sen-
sor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstructions, have the radar sensor realigned
at an authorized dealer.
•
Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” warning will display, and a chime will sound
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such
as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may
also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions,
such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the
inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster
display will read “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” and the system will have degraded
performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system
will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under
rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any
vehicles or objects in its path this warning may tempo-
rarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is
no longer present, the system will return to full
functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once
on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstructions, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster dis-
play reads “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may
be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction
that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporar-
ily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
The following are examples of these types of situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only with an
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller. Aftermarket trailer
brake controllers will not activate the trailer brakes
when ACC is braking.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merg-
ing in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may
move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause
your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stabil-
ity, with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is
out of the curve, the system will resume your original
set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
Offset Driving Condition Example
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane
changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until
it's too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may
not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-
changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to
apply the brakes if necessary.
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until
they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For
example, ACC will not react in situations where the
vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle
ahead is stopped in your lane. It will consider this
stopped vehicle a stationary object as it did not previ-
ously detect movement from it. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear,
and if equipped, the front fascia/bumper and a
detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward
(e.g. during a parking maneuver). The vehicle brakes
may be automatically applied and released when per-
forming a reverse parking maneuver if the system
detects a possible collision with an obstacle.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
4
NOTE:
•
The driver can disable the automatic braking func-
tion by turning ParkSense off via the ParkSense
switch. The driver can also override automatic brak-
ing by changing the gear or by pressing the gas
pedal over 90% of its capacity during the braking
event.
•
Automatic emergency braking is not available if the
vehicle is in 4WD Low.
•
Automatic emergency braking will not be available if
there is a faulted condition detected with the
ParkSense Park Assist system or the Braking Sys-
tem Module.
•
The automatic emergency braking function may only
be applied if the vehicle deceleration is not enough
to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle.
•
The automatic emergency braking function may not
be applied fast enough for obstacles that move
toward the rear of the vehicle from the left and/or
right sides.
•
The automatic emergency braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the Customer Programmable
Features section of the Uconnect system.
•
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
state for the automatic emergency braking function
through ignition cycles.
The rear automatic emergency braking function is
intended to assist the driver in avoiding possible colli-
sions with detected obstacles when backing up in
REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
•
The rear automatic emergency braking system is for
emergency braking to avoid an imminent collision. It
is designed to assist the driver and not to substitute
the driver.
•
The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle's movements.
For limitations of this system and recommendations,
see
page 116.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is
in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these gear selector positions, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi-
mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased
to less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). A display
warning will appear in the instrument cluster display if
the vehicle is in REVERSE and the speed exceeds
7 mph (11 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
Six ParkSense sensors located in the front fascia/
bumper (if equipped) and six ParkSense sensors (four
when vehicle is not equipped with front sensors)
located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area in
front and behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’
field of view. The front sensors detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper. The rear sen-
sors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. These distances depend on the location, type
and orientation of the obstacle in the horizontal
direction.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the
vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions
based on the object’s distance and location relative to
the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left
and/or right rear region and the system will produce a
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the dis-
play will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 sec-
ond tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
4
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None
6th
Flashing
5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid
7th
Flashing
6th
Flashing
5th
Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None
6th
Flashing
5th
Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If the radio is on, ParkSense will reduce the volume of
the radio when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible
alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when
an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is station-
ary, and brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
•
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be
selected from the Uconnect system
page 135.
•
The chime volume settings include low, medium,
and high.
•
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
state through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display
page 72. It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and
the detected obstacle.
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Pro-
grammable Features section of the Uconnect system
page 135.
ENABLING AND DISABLING
PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pressed to disable the
system, the LED light on the switch will be illuminated.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-
onds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and
the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display
will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
When ParkSense is disabled and the gear selector is
moved to the DRIVE position, no warning message will
be displayed.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense
is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch
LED will be off when the system is enabled. When the
system is disabled due to a fault, the LED light on the
switch will be illuminated. If the driver tries to press the
ParkSense switch to activate the system, the button will
blink for five seconds to show the request was received,
but cannot be fulfilled.
OPERATION WITH A TRAILER
For vehicles equipped with an Integrated Trailer Brake
Module (ITBM), the operation of the rear sensors is
automatically deactivated when the trailer's electric
plug is inserted in the vehicle's tow hook socket. The
front system is still functional, and the arcs will be over-
laid with a “Trailer” message. The rear sensors are
automatically reactivated when the trailer's cable plug
is removed.
When the vehicle is connected to a trailer, the instru-
ment cluster display will show the "Rear ParkSense
Unavailable Trailer Connected" message in the following
situations:
•
For five seconds at vehicle start up
•
For five seconds when the ParkSense button is
pushed, as long as an object is not detected in the
front
•
As long as the vehicle is in REVERSE (vehicle
graphic displayed with a trailer overlay)
NOTE:
For more information on the Integrated Trailer Brake
Module, see
page 127.
For vehicles not equipped with ITBM, the automatic
braking may falsely be applied if a trailer is hooked up,
and Park Assist is not manually deactivated. It is also
possible, the trailer may be mistaken as a close object.
WARNING!
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be dis-
connected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not
used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear
fascia/bumper when the vehicle sounds the continu-
ous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
4
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System
has detected a fault condition, the instrument cluster
will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and
it will display the "ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Rear
Sensors", "ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Front Sensors",
or the "ParkSense Unavailable Service Required" mes-
sage for five seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system has detected a fault condition, the instrument
cluster display will display a "ParkSense Unavailable
Wipe Rear Sensors", "ParkSense Unavailable Wipe
Front Sensors" or "ParkSense Unavailable Service
Required" pop-up message for five seconds. After five
seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with
"Unavailable" at either the front or rear sensor location
depending on where the fault is detected. The system
will continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is
functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
"ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Rear Sensors",
"ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Front Sensors", or
"ParkSense Unavailable Service Required" messages if
an object is detected within the five second pop-up
duration. The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
If "ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Rear Sensors" or
"ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Front Sensors" appears in
the instrument cluster display make sure the outer sur-
face and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear see an
authorized dealer.
If the "ParkSense Unavailable Service Required" mes-
sage appears in the instrument cluster display, see an
authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE
SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do
not scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
PRECAUTIONS
•
Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of ParkSense.
•
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument clus-
ter will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore,
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you
turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
•
When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
•
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
•
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
•
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) of
the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result
in the system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed
in the instrument cluster.
•
ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position. An opened liftgate could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
•
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly be disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia/bumper when the
vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sen-
sors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball
(Continued)
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
The LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera
to detect lane markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied), the Lane-
Sense system provides a haptic warning in the form of
torque applied to the steering wheel to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If the driver
continues to drift out of the lane, the LaneSense sys-
tem provides a visual warning through the instrument
cluster display to prompt the driver to remain within the
lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying force to the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides visual warn-
ings through the instrument cluster display to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic or a torque warning
will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the Lane-
Sense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on
the steering wheel and provide an audible warning to
the driver if removed. The system will cancel if the
driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense
button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense On” message is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system state
on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane
drift condition through the instrument cluster display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are
gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been
detected and the LaneSense telltale
is solid white.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
•
When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense
telltale
is solid white when only the left lane
marking has been detected and the system is ready
to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster
display if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
•
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has
been approached and is in a lane departure situa-
tion, the left lane line flashes yellow (on/off), and
the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid
white to flashing yellow.
System On (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
4
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior
for a right lane departure when only the right lane
marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
•
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines
turn from gray to white to indicate that both of the
lane markings have been detected. The LaneSense
telltale
is solid green when both lane markings
have been detected and the system is on to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster display
and a torque warning in the steering wheel if an
unintentional lane departure occurs.
•
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the left lane line will turn solid yellow. The
LaneSense telltale
changes from solid green to
solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
•
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has
been approached and is in a lane departure situa-
tion, the left lane line flashes yellow (on/off). The
LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow to
flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior
for a right lane departure.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Line With Flashing
Yellow Telltale)
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Line With Solid Yellow Telltale)
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Line With Flashing
Yellow Telltale)
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the inten-
sity of the torque warning and the warning zone sensi-
tivity (early/late) that you can configure through the
Uconnect system
page 135.
NOTE:
•
When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
•
The warnings are disabled with use of the turn
signal.
•
The system will not apply torque to the steering
wheel whenever a safety system engages (Anti-Lock
Brakes, Traction Control System, Electronic Stability
Control, Forward Collision Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear Back
Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the
gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “Check Entire Sur-
roundings” across the top of the screen. After five sec-
onds this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license
plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
era delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited
and the previous screen appears.
Manual Activation Of The Back Up Camera
1. Press the Vehicle Menu button located at the bot-
tom of the Uconnect display. Then select the Con-
trols tab.
2. Press the Rear View Camera button to turn the Rear
View Camera system on.
3. Alternatively, the Rear View Camera feature can be
enabled by pressing the Rear View Camera button in
the App Drawer.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable
modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect system
page 135. In certain radio con-
figurations, these modes of operation will be found in
the Camera section of the vehicle settings menu.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
era delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited
and the previous screen appears. When the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned on,
the camera image will continue to be displayed for up
to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the
following conditions occur: the vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, the
vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the
touchscreen X button to disable the display of the Rear
View Camera is pressed.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its pro-
jected back up path based on the steering wheel posi-
tion. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a
hitch/receiver. Different colored zones indicate the dis-
tance to the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0-1ft(0-30cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
Rear View Camera — Viewing At Speed
When the vehicle is in PARK, NEUTRAL or
DRIVE, the Rear View Camera can be acti-
vated with the Rear View Camera button in
the Controls tab of the Vehicle Menu. This
feature allows the customer to monitor the area directly
behind the vehicle (or trailer, if equipped) for up to
10 seconds while driving. If the vehicle speed remains
below 8 mph (13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image
will be displayed continuously until deactivated via the
touchscreen X button.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You
are responsible for the safety of your surroundings
and must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
4
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the outer
edge of the fuel door.
NOTE:
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside
the pipe seal the system.
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper doors while
refueling.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
4. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to
allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
5. Remove the nozzle and push the fuel door all the
way in to secure it in place.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light to turn on.
•
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver's side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), front and rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), and Vehicle Identifi-
cation Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number
is included on this label and indicates the Month, Day
and Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears
on the bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front
and rear (GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR
and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of
the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Fuel Filler
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the
cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not
exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label repre-
sents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement
tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle
for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle
fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants
or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle
on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo
are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be deter-
mined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for
operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been
exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the
vehicle should then be determined separately to be
sure that the load is properly distributed over the front
and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the
GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the specified
GVWR and maximum Payload. If so, weight must be
shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is
distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and
the way the brakes operate.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR,
maximum payload or the maximum front and rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it
can change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cover-
age, follow the requirements and recommendations in
this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do
not exceed the GVWR
page 120.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of
all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
4
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg) or
more, it is recommended to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you
use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating
(GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and
rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear
axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
front or rear GAWR
page 120.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose con-
trol of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load
on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by
the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that can
be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer
tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associ-
ated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a swaying
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel
brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to
eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball
or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These
kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow small and
medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more consis-
tent steering and brake control thereby enhancing tow-
ing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway con-
trol also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and
trailer stability. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) and a weight
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended
for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required
depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading
to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
requirements.
WARNING!
•
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in a collision.
•
Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be com-
patible with surge brake couplers. Consult with
your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable
Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional
information.
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH
ADJUSTMENT
1. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to the ground; this is height
H1.
Measuring Height (H)
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight
distribution bars connected.
3. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to the ground; this is height
H2.
4. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distribut-
ing bars per the manufacturers’ recommendations
so that the height of the front fender is approxi-
mately (H2-H1)/2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference
between H2 and H1 above normal ride height [H1]).
NOTE:
This method is approximate. If available, use scales
for greater accuracy when setting the weight distri-
bution hitch, especially for trailer loads near or at
the maximum trailer weight rating.
5. The vehicle can now be driven.
Measurement Example Example Height (mm)
H1 925
H2 946
H2-H1 21
(H2-H1)/2 10.5
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 935.5
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with
tow haul mode engaged (if equipped).
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industr y Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,588 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,721 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
For the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain see
page 124.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
4
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS) — NON-SRT
Engine GCWR Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
3.6L - RWD Light Duty Cooling 8,900 lb (4,037 kg) 3,500 lb (1,588 kg) 350 lb (159 kg)
3.6L - RWD 11,600 lb (5,262 kg) 6,200 lb (2,812 kg) 620 lb (281 kg)
3.6L - AWD Light Duty Cooling 8,900 lb (4,037 kg) 3,500 lb (1,588 kg) 350 lb (159 kg)
3.6L - AWD 11,600 lb (5,262 kg) 6,200 lb (2,812 kg) 620 lb (281 kg)
5.7L - RWD 13,100 lb (5,942 kg) 7,400 lb (3,357 kg) 740 lb (336 kg)
5.7L - AWD 13,100 lb (5,942 kg) 7,200 lb (3,266 kg) 720 lb (327 kg)
5.7L - AWD R/T Tow N Go 14,600 lb (6,622 kg) 8,700 lb (3,946 kg) 870 lb (395 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire And Loading
Information Placard
page 284. The addition of passengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer Weight (GTW).
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) — SRT
Engine/Transmission GCWR Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
6.2L Automatic 14,600 lb (6,622 kg) 8,700 lb (3,901 kg) 870 lb (395 kg)
6.4L Automatic 14,600 lb (6,622 kg) 8,700 lb (3,901 kg) 870 lb (395 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
•
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight refer-
enced on the Tire And Loading Information Placard
page 284.
•
The manufacturer does not recommend using the
Run Flat feature while driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or towing a trailer.
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH RECEIVER COVER
REMOVAL — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch
receiver cover, this must be removed to access the
trailer hitch receiver (if equipped). This cover is located
at the bottom center of the rear fascia/bumper.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom
of the hitch receiver cover a quarter turn counter-
clockwise and pull bottom of the hitch receiver cover
outward (towards you).
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you)
then downwards to disengage the tabs located at
the top of the hitch receiver cover to remove.
To reinstall the cover after towing, repeat the procedure
in reverse order.
NOTE:
Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver cover in
the bumper fascia prior to installation.
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
WARNING!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the
front of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the
tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to
sway severely side to side which will cause loss of
control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trail-
ers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer
collisions.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information Plac-
ard for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle
page 287.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of the new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are
recommended.
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainers
Hitch Receiver Cover
Weight Distribution
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
4
CAUTION!
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in Scheduled Servicing
page 253. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as pos-
sible:
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to con-
trol. You could lose control of your vehicle and have
a collision.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause
a loss of control, poor performance or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK (P). For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N). Always,
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
○ GVWR
○ GTW
○ GAWR
○ Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
Towing Requirements — Tires
•
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a com-
pact spare tire.
•
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
•
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
•
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
•
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
•
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limits.
•
For further information page 284.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
•
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the
trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and
possible personal injury.
•
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped
with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an
electronic brake controller is not required.
•
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess
of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing, you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead
to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
Integrated Trailer Brake Module
(ITBM) — If Equipped
Your vehicle may have an ITBM for electric and Electric
Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes.
NOTE:
This module has been designed and verified with elec-
tric trailer brakes and EOH systems. Some previous
EOH systems may not be compatible with ITBM.
The user interface consists of the following:
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to acti-
vate power to the trailer's electric brakes independent
of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the manual brake control
lever is activated while the brake is also applied, the
greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to
the trailer brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle's brake lamps will come on
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes
are applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection
status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition
is turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment button or
sliding the manual brake control lever will display the
GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the Trailer Brake Sta-
tus Indicator Light will not be displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Inte-
grated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the Trailer Brake
Status Indicator Light will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control
power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments.
The GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of
10 or decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control
for the specific towing condition and should be changed
as towing conditions change. Changes to towing condi-
tions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions
and weather.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE:
This should only be performed in a traffic free environ-
ment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working
condition, functioning normally and properly
adjusted. See a trailer dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connec-
tions according to the trailer manufacturer's
instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged
in, the trailer connected message should appear in
the instrument cluster display (if the connection is
not recognized by the ITBM, braking functions will
not be available), the GAIN setting will illuminate
and the correct type of trailer must be selected from
the instrument cluster display options.
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel
until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the screen.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter
“TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the Trailer Brake
Type appears on the screen.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or
DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type
appears on the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry,
level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual brake con-
trol lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing
tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels
turn freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point
just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier
trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even
with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
4
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the instrument
cluster display. Display messages, along with a single
chime, will be displayed when a malfunction is deter-
mined in the trailer connection, trailer brake control, or
on the trailer
page 72.
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss
of trailer braking. There may be an increase in stop-
ping distance or trailer instability which could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss
of trailer braking. There may be an increase in stop-
ping distance or trailer instability which could result in
damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property.
NOTE:
•
An aftermarket controller may be available for use
with trailers with air or EOH trailer brake systems. To
determine the type of brakes on your trailer and the
availability of controllers, check with your trailer
manufacturer or dealer.
•
Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may
cause damage to the electrical system and elec-
tronic modules of the vehicle. See an authorized
dealer if an aftermarket module is to be installed.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights
And Wiring
Whenever pulling a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required
for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer con-
nector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
•
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle (or any other device plugged into vehicle’s
electrical connectors) before launching a boat into
water.
•
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Ground
2—Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing
up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The transmis-
sion controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent
shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does
occur while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift
control to manually select a lower gear.
If equipped with Tow N Go, it is recommended to place
the vehicle in tow mode by pushing the TOW button.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
AutoStick
•
When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance
and avoids frequent downshifts. For example,
choose “5” if the desired speed can be maintained.
Choose “4” or “3” if needed to maintain the desired
speed.
•
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as nec-
essary to avoid extended driving at high RPM.
Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade
and road conditions allow.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
•
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
•
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disen-
gage until you can get back to cruising speed.
•
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads
to maximize fuel efficiency.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
4
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
Rear-Wheel Drive
Models
All-Wheel Drive Models With Single-Speed
Transfer Case
All-Wheel Drive Models With Two-Speed
Transfer Case
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
•
See Instructions:
•
Transmission In PARK
•
Transfer Case In N (Neutral)
•
Tow In Forward Direction
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
NOTE:
Recreational towing is not allowed on SRT vehicles.
•
These vehicles may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
•
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provin-
cial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
REAR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, follow-
ing the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the transmis-
sion into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, follow-
ing the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for tow-
ing, to secure the front wheels in the straight
position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause
severe transmission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
(SINGLE-SPEED TRANSFER CASE)
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
not have a N (Neutral) position in the transfer case.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer
provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously listed
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
(TWO-SPEED TRANSFER CASE)
The transfer case must be shifted into N (Neutral) and
the transmission must be in PARK for recreational tow-
ing. The N (Neutral) selection button is adjacent to the
transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of
transfer case N (Neutral) can take place with the selec-
tor switch in any position. There is a Mopar® Flat Tow
Harness kit available to enable the Electronic Power
Steering (EPS) while flat towing the vehicle, to provide
more front axle stability. See an authorized dealer for
more information and installation.
NOTE:
If the Mopar® Flat Tow Harness kit is installed, the EPS
will use power from the battery to keep the EPS pow-
ered during a flat tow. A battery charging system is rec-
ommended so that the battery is not depleted over a
long trip.
CAUTION!
•
DO NOT dolly tow any AWD vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON
the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle
trailer).
•
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to
the transfer case.
•
The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
•
Before recreational towing, be certain that the
transfer case is fully in N (Neutral)
page 131.
Otherwise, internal damage will result.
•
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously
listed requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
Shifting Into N (Neutral)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the park-
ing brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position dis-
engages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
(Continued)
WARNING!
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral) before recre-
ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground,
with the engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
○
Steps 1 through 3 are requirements that must be
met before pushing the N (Neutral) button, and
must continue to be met until the shift has been
completed. If any of these requirements are not
met before pushing the N (Neutral) button or are
no longer met during the shift, the N (Neutral)
indicator light will flash continuously until all
requirements are met or until the N (Neutral)
button is released.
○
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
4
○
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and
hold the recessed transfer case N (Neutral) button
(located by the selector switch) for four seconds.
The light behind the N symbol will blink, indicating
shift in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on
solid) when the shift to N (Neutral) is complete. A
“FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” mes-
sage will appear in the instrument cluster.
5. After the shift is completed and the N (Neutral) light
stays on, release the N (Neutral) button.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and
ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
8. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the transmis-
sion back into NEUTRAL.
9. Firmly apply the parking brake.
10. With the transmission and transfer case in NEU-
TRAL, push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP but-
ton until the engine turns off.
11. Place the transmission gear selector in PARK.
Release the brake pedal.
12. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice (with-
out pressing the brake pedal) to turn the ignition to
the OFF mode.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
N (Neutral) and the engine running. With the transfer
case in N (Neutral) ensure that the engine is OFF
before shifting the transmission into PARK.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suit-
able tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out Of N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con-
nected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
○
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
met before pushing the N (Neutral) button, and
must continue to be met until the shift has been
completed. If any of these requirements are not
met before pushing the N (Neutral) button or are
no longer met during the shift, the N (Neutral)
indicator light will flash continuously until all
requirements are met or until the N (Neutral)
button is released.
○
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
○
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and
hold the recessed transfer case N (Neutral) button
(located by the selector switch) for one second.
7. When the N (Neutral) indicator light turns off,
release the N (Neutral) button.
N (Neutral) Button
N (Neutral) Button
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
8. After the N (Neutral) button has been released, the
transfer case will shift to the position indicated by
the selector switch.
9. Shift the transmission into PARK and turn the
engine off.
10. Release the brake pedal.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE,
release the brake pedal, and check that the
vehicle operates normally.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a nar-
rower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds
as conventional passenger cars any more than sports
cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As
with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle
rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use 4WD Low — If Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD Low for additional
traction. This range should be limited to extreme situa-
tions such as deep snow, mud, or sand where addi-
tional low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle
speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be
avoided when in 4WD Low.
WARNING!
Do not drive in 4WD Low on dry pavement; driveline
damage may result. 4WD Low locks front and rear
drivelines together and does not allow for differential
action between the front to rear driveshafts. Driving
in 4WD Low on pavement will cause driveline binding;
use only on wet or slippery surfaces.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driv-
ing through water may cause damage not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep
water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-
off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or
the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing water
avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (23 cm). The flowing
water can erode the streambed, causing your vehicle to
sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are
downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to ensure the fluids have not been con-
taminated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appear-
ance) should be flushed/changed as soon as possible
to prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to AWD Low if neces-
sary
page 95. Only shift into a lower gear to main-
tain forward motion. Over-revving the engine can spin
the wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads,
because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
4
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the condi-
tions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to AWD Low. Use
FIRST gear and AWD Low for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climb-
ing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine, and
shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill, allowing
the compression braking of the engine to help regulate
the speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle
speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding
the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or can-
not make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in tipping
and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight
down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never back down a hill
in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill; always
drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward
motion by turning the front wheels slowly. This may pro-
vide a fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually pro-
vide traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer
case into AWD Low. Let the vehicle go slowly down the
hill with all four wheels turning against engine compres-
sion drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle
speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis-
sion whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle
than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it
is always a good idea to check for damage. That way
you can get any problems taken care of right away and
have your vehicle ready when you need it.
•
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension,
and exhaust system for damage.
•
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean
as required.
•
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque
to the values specified in the Service Manual.
•
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide dam-
age to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
•
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes
inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to pre-
vent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
•
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels
for impacted material. Impacted material can cause
a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 4C/4C
NAV With 8.4-inch Display or Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1-
inch Display systems, refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes
only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features
in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communica-
tions. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve
over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. As
always, if you experience unusual behavior, contact an
authorized dealer immediately,
page 307, or refer
to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for addi-
tional contact information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software)
is installed.
WARNING!
•
ONLY insert trusted media devices/components
into your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possi-
bility for vehicle systems to be breached.
•
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, contact an authorized dealer
immediately.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features, sta-
bility, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn
about available Uconnect software updates.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located
on the center of the instrument panel. These buttons
allow you to access and change the customer program-
mable features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the instru-
ment panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER con-
trol knob located on the right side. Turn the control
knob to scroll through menus and change settings.
Push the center of the control knob one or more times
to select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap
the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
On the Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display, push
and hold the Power button on the radio’s faceplate for a
minimum of 15 seconds to reset the radio.
135
5
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURES
For the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Press the Apps
button, then press the Settings
button on the touchscreen to display the menu settings
screen. In this mode, the Uconnect system allows you
to access all of the available programmable features.
NOTE:
•
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the set-
ting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or
press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of
the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow but-
ton on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available settings.
For the Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display
Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings tab on
the top of the touchscreen. In this menu, the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available pro-
grammable features.
NOTE:
•
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the set-
ting is complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to the
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
136 MULTIMEDIA
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will display in the chosen
language. The available setting is:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available languages are English, Español, Italiano, and Français.
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The
available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available languages are English, Français, Italiano, and Español.
Display Mode This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system
automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights
ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to
“Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights
OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to
“Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Units This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km,
or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), “Power” (SRT only) (HP [US], HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque” (SRT
only) (lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Keyboard This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable keyboards are “ABCDEF” Keyboard, “QWERTY” Keyboard,
and “AZERTY” Keyboard.
MULTIMEDIA 137
5
Setting Name Description
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn-by-Turn Displayed in
Cluster
This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-Ups This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-Ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available languages are English, Français, Italiano, and Español.
Display Mode
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows for more customization with the radio
display.
Display Brightness Headlights On
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to
“Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness Headlights Off
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to
“Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Units
This setting will allow you to change the unit display. The available options are “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel
Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), “Power” (SRT
only) (HP [US], HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque” (SRT only) (lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-Ups Displayed
in Cluster
This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
138 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Ready To Drive Pop-Ups This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-Ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be “Off” for this setting to be available. The
“12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will change the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available options are “Hey Uconnect” and “Hey Dodge”.
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow voice barge-in to be turned on and off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on and off.
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will
deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
New Text Message Pop-Ups This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. This setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. This setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked to the key fob.
Navigation Pop-Ups This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. This setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Settings This setting will direct you to the Navigation settings within Navigation Mode.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat &
Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote
started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate
the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is
started.
Audio Settings This setting will take you to the Audio settings for the vehicle profiles.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
MULTIMEDIA 139
5
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Automatic Emergency Braking This setting will take you to the selectable options for “Forward Collision Warning” and “Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity”.
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision system on or off. The “Off” setting will deactivate the Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking”
setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW
system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system
signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at a far distance
from the vehicle.
Active Lane Management Warning
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide lane departure feedback. The available settings are
“Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
Active Lane Management
This setting will alert the driver by vibrating the steering wheel and moving the steering wheel when a lane departure is detected.
The available options within Active Lane Management are Lane Management “Vibration Only”, “Steering Assist Only”, and “Vibra-
tion + Steering Assist”; Lane Warning “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”; Vibration Strength “Low”, “Medium” and “High”; and Steering
Assist Strength “Low”, “Medium” and “High”.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected and can provide both an audible chime and a
visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off
Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will
activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Electric Power Steering Default This setting will change the Electric Power setting to “Normal”,” Sport”, or “Comfort”.
Paddle Shifters This setting will turn the paddle shifters on or off.
140 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
LaneSense Warning — Located In Lane-
Sense Submenu
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide lane departure feedback. The available settings are
“Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength — Located In Lane-
Sense Submenu
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a lane departure. The available settings are “Low”,
“Medium”, and “High”.
Trailer Length For Blind Spot Alert This setting will detect the length of a trailer. Auto will automatically detect the length. Max sets all trailers to 39.5 ft. (12 meters).
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active
Guidelines
This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Rear Seat Alert
When this setting is turned on and the rear doors are opened while the engine is running, or if the engine is turned on within
10 minutes of the door opening, a message will appear to check the rear seat when the vehicle is powered OFF.
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in the instrument
cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km,
or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), “Power” (SRT only) (HP [US], HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque” (SRT
only) (lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
MULTIMEDIA 141
5
Clock/Clock & Date
When the Clock/Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time Hours This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will
increase the hours. The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will
increase the minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Time Format This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The
“12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Set Time This setting will allow you to set the hours and minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “+”
setting will increase the hours or minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the hours or minutes.
Set Date This setting will allow you to set the date. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available.
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smart-
phone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Do Not Disturb This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb” settings menu. The settings are “Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message”
(custom, default), and “Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb All” settings menu. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
142 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Enable Two Active Phones This setting will enable or disable two active phones with the vehicle. The setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Options This setting will change the voice type during a Voice Recognition session. The available options are “Male” and “Female”.
Voice Response Length This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system. The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio
description from the system. The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description from the system.
Show Command List This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will always show the Command List. The “With
Help” setting will show the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn
the Command List off.
Wake Up Word This setting will change the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available options are “Hey Uconnect” and “Hey Dodge”.
Voice Barge-in This setting will turn the Voice Barge-in function on or off.
Navigation — If Equipped
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which
icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
MULTIMEDIA 143
5
Trailer
When the Trailer button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to trailer towing.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Trailer Select Select from “Trailer 1”, “Trailer 2”, “Trailer 3”, and “Trailer 4”. These trailer designations can be used to save different trailer
settings.
Trailer Brake Type This setting will set the system to a specific trailer type. The available options are “Light Electric”, “Heavy Electric”, “Light Electric
Over Hydraulic”, and “Heavy Electric Over Hydraulic”.
Trailer Name This setting will personalize the trailer name depending on the type of trailer you are hauling. Select the trailer name from the fol-
lowing list: trailer, boat, car, cargo, equipment, flatbed, horse, livestock, motorcycle, snowmobile, travel, and utility.
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active
Guidelines
This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
144 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position and the transmission gear selector is
in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
•
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle
purchase.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The avail-
able settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available
settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 145
5
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the
Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting
will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock/1st Press of Key
Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door”
setting will only unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only
one push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked to the key fob.
Power Liftgate Alert This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering. Selectable settings are “On” and “Off”.
146 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
When Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has
been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seats This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat &
Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote
started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate
the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is
started. If equipped, the only selectable option will be “With Vehicle Start”.
Key Off/Engine Off Options
When the Key Off /Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate when
the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seats This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Key Off Power Delay/Engine Off Power
Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will
deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The avail-
able settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
MULTIMEDIA 147
5
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within
the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be
moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds
up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Auto On Radio This setting will turn the radio on with vehicle start and recall the last known radio state. The available options are “On”, “Off”, and
“Last Recall”.
Volume Adjustment This setting will let you adjust the volume levels for “Media”, “Phone”, “Navigation”, and “VR” (Voice Recognition).
AUX Switches
When the AUX Switches button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the four vehicle AUX switches.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
AUX 1-4 This setting will adjust the type and power source for the four vehicle AUX switches. There are two types: “Latching” and “Momen-
tary”. The power source for the AUX switches can either be set to run off the “Battery” or from the “Ignition”. In addition to setting
the type and power source, you can set if the vehicle will recall the previous state at which the AUX switches were set. The Recalled
Last State setting can be set to “On” or “Off”. Last state conditions are met only if the type is set to Latching and the power source
is set to Ignition.
148 MULTIMEDIA
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the “App Favorited” pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the “App Unfavorited” pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any connected phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected phone on or off.
Navigation Pop-ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-ups on or off.
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip specific
radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
•
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profiles, & Settings This setting will direct you to the SiriusXM® profile settings.
Block Explicit This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Tune Start This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information.
MULTIMEDIA 149
5
Accessibility
When the Accessibility button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the option related to the vehicle’s theater system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Accessibility
The “Accessibility” feature announces a function prior to performing the action selected when using DVD/Blu-ray™ and USB Video
functions, when it is activated. For example, when activated, and the Play button is selected, the system will announce “play button
selected”, and then once pressed again the Play button will perform its action.
Software Update
When the Software Update button is selected, the system will display a menu with possible Wi-Fi connections. From this page, you can select and connect to one of the avail-
able Wi-Fi networks to begin system software updates. To begin, make sure the system is set to allow for Wi-Fi updates.
1. Select the desired Wi-Fi network from the available list.
2. Enter the Wi-Fi password. If the password is entered incorrectly, the system will display a notification that the connection failed.
3. Once connected, the system will begin scanning for any system updates. Press the Stop Scan button to end this process.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
150 MULTIMEDIA
System Information — If Equipped
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Version Information When this feature is selected, the radio version build will be displayed.
License Information When this feature is selected, a software license screen will appear, displaying the system software version.
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can
clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the App Drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Apps This setting will delete all installed Apps on the vehicle.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices
and presets.
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection This setting will reset the password used for the in-vehicle Wi-Fi.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
MULTIMEDIA 151
5
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
Feature Description
Radio/Media Press/Push the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media Mode and
access the radio functions and external audio sources
page 154.
Phone Press/Push the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free phone
system
page 159.
Settings Press/Push the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings
page 135.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted selection on
the screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune a radio
station.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the MUTE button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system off. Push
it again to turn the audio back on.
152 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the VOLUME & On/Off button on the
faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the VOLUME & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to reset the
radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen from freezing.
BACK
Push the BACK button on the faceplate to go back to a previous screen in the headunit.
MUTE/VOLUME Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the MUTE/VOLUME button on the
faceplate to mute or unmute the system.
SAFETY AND GENERAL
INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Only
use and interact with the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in a collision and death or serious per-
sonal injury.
Please read this manual carefully before using the sys-
tem. It contains instructions on how to use the system
in a safe and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. Doing so
can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety precautions. Failure
to do so may result in injury or property damage.
•
Become familiar with the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle before you drive on the
roadway so using Uconnect will be more intuitive
and will not require prolonged viewing of the screen
while you are driving.
•
When driving, looking at the touchscreen should
only be done by a glance when safe to do so. If pro-
longed viewing of the screen is required, choose a
safe and secure location where you can pull over
and park safely to do so.
•
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. Failure to
do so may cause injury or damage to the product.
See an authorized dealer for repair.
•
Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a
level that still allows you to hear outside traffic and
emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
•
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated electronic
device. Do not let young children use the system.
•
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play your
music or sound system at loud volumes. Exercise
caution when setting the volume on the system.
•
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture
away from the system. Besides damage to the sys-
tem, moisture can cause electric shocks as with any
electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed dependent. For
your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the
touchscreen features while the vehicle is in motion.
Care And Maintenance
•
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or sharp
objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), which could
scratch the surface.
•
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on the
screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens cleaning
cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.
•
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a
cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol or an
isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50.
Be sure to follow the solvent manufacturer's precau-
tions and directions
page 310.
MULTIMEDIA 153
5
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO
CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the
rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the
rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the
bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the right-hand control’s center button will make
the radio switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left-hand con-
trol is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation
in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next track on
the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing
the switch up twice will go forward two tracks. Pushing
the bottom switch goes to the beginning of the current
track, or the beginning of the previous track if it is
within eight seconds after the current track begins to
play. Double pressing the bottom button switch will skip
to the previous track if it is after eight seconds into the
current track.
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
•
AM
•
FM
•
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter the
Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM, FM, and
SXM, can then be selected by pressing the correspond-
ing button in Radio Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the VOLUME & On/Off control knob to turn on and
off the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping.
Turning the VOLUME & On/Off control knob clockwise
increases the volume, and counterclockwise decreases
it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Mute Button
Push the MUTE button to mute or unmute the system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio sta-
tion frequency. Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to
choose a selection.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by
pressing the double arrow buttons on the touchscreen
to the right and left of the radio station display or by
pushing the left steering wheel audio control button up
or down.
Seek Up
and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down
button to tune the radio to the next available station or
channel. During a Seek Up/Down function, if the radio
reaches the starting station after passing through the
entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Remote Sound System Controls
154 MULTIMEDIA
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up or
Seek Down
button to advance the radio through
the available stations or channels at a faster rate. The
radio stops at the next available station or channel
when the button on the touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or Seek
Down
button will scan the different frequency
bands at a slower rate.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the
radio screen to directly tune to a desired radio station
or channel.
Press the available number button on the touchscreen
to begin selecting a desired station. Once a number has
been entered, any numbers that are no longer possible
(stations that cannot be reached) will become
deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the Back
button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been entered, press
“Ok”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and the system
will automatically tune to that station.
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like to
hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
on the steering wheel and wait
for the beep to say a command. See an example:
•
“ Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
•
“ Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of what
to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR
button
and say “ Help”. The system provides you
with a list of commands.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode —
If Equipped
NOTE:
Some SiriusXM® features are not supported by all
SiriusXM® channels or content, for example song and
artist favorites, sport game notifications, tune start, and
others.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satellite-to-
receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear,
coast-to-coast radio content. SiriusXM® is a
subscription-based service.
Visit https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or review
your SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit for more information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold sepa-
rately after the trial included with the new vehicle pur-
chase. If you decide to continue your service at the end
of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will auto-
matically renew and bill at then-current rates until you
call SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See
SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change. SiriusXM®
satellite service is available only to those at least
18 and older in the 48 contiguous US and D.C. Our
SiriusXM® satellite service is also available in Canada
and Puerto Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM®
Internet radio service is available throughout their satel-
lite service area and in AK. © 2023 SiriusXM® Radio
Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios equipped
with a Satellite receiver. In order to receive satellite
radio, the vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view
to the sky.
If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might have
to change the vehicle’s position in order to receive a
signal. In most cases, the satellite radio does not
receive a signal in underground parking garages or
tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a sub-
scription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the radio
does not have the necessary subscription, the radio is
able to receive the Preview channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio subscription,
US residents visit
https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or call:
1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ or
call: 1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID) located
at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the SXM
button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite Mode:
•
The SXM button on the touchscreen is highlighted.
MULTIMEDIA 155
5
•
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top of
the screen.
•
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in the
center.
•
The Program Information is displayed at the bottom
of the Channel Number.
•
The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed below
the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by Direct
Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions common to
all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/Weather button,
and Favorite button functions are available in
SiriusXM® Mode.
REPLAY
Replay provides a means to store and replay up to
22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk
radio. Once the channel is switched, content in replay
memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The Play/
Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will display at
the top of the screen, along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touch-
screen any time during the Replay Mode.
Play/Pause Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the playing of live or rewound con-
tent at any time. Play can be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button again on the
touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds rewinds the con-
tent. The radio begins playing the content at the point at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five
seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be done when the content is previously
rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live content. A continuous press of the Forward
button on the touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio begins playing the content at
the point at which the press is released.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the playing of live content.
156 MULTIMEDIA
FAVORITES
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to acti-
vate the favorites menu, which will time out within
20 seconds in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X
button.
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite artist
or song that is currently playing. The radio then uses
this information to alert you when either the favorite
artist or song is being played at any time by any of the
SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be stored in
the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a favor-
ite artist, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen
and then the Favorite Artist button on the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a favor-
ite song, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen
and then the Favorite Song button on the touchscreen.
BROWSE IN SXM
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to edit
Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump settings,
along with providing the SiriusXM® Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can exit
submenus to return to a parent menu by pressing the
Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When press-
ing the All button, the following categories become
available:
•
Channel List: Press the Channel List to display all
the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can scroll the
Channel List by pressing the Up and Down arrows,
located on the right side of the screen. Scrolling can
also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
•
Genre List: Press the Genre button on the touch-
screen to display a list of Genres. You can select any
desired Genre by pressing the Genre List. The radio
tunes to a channel with the content in the selected
Genre.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the Favor-
ites list and to configure the Alert Settings, along with
providing a list of Channels currently airing any of the
items in the Favorites list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up and
Down arrows located at the right side of the screen.
Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/
SCROLL knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen
to delete all of the Favorites or press the Trash Can icon
next to the Favorite to be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the Favorites
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose
from a visual alert or audible and visual alert when one
of your favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of the
Browse screen. This feature provides you with the abil-
ity to select teams, edit the selection, and set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The On-Air
list provides a list of Channels currently airing any of the
items in the Selections list, and pressing any of the
items in the list tunes the radio to that channel.
— If Equipped
Press the button on the touchscreen to activate the
League Scroll list. Press the chosen league and a scroll
list of all teams within the league will appear, then you
can select a team by pressing the corresponding box. A
check mark appears for all teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen
to delete all of the selections or press the Trash Can
icon next to the selection to be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. The
Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from “Alert
me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert upon score
update” or both when one or more of your selections is
airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels.
MULTIMEDIA 157
5
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from the
beginning when you tune to a music channel using one
of the 12 presets. This feature occurs the first time the
preset is selected during that current song.
Setting Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are
activated by pressing any of the Preset buttons, located
at the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save as a
preset, press and hold the numbered button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio
Modes.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main menu
to activate the Audio Settings screen.
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source Select
button on the touchscreen and the desired mode but-
ton on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are
the Media sources available. When available, you can
select the Browse button on the touchscreen to be
given these options:
•
Now Playing
•
Artists
•
Albums
•
Genres
•
Songs
•
Playlists
•
Folders
Types of Media Modes
USB MODE
Overview
USB Mode is entered by inserting a USB device into the
USB port,
BLUETOOTH® MODE
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode is
entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device, containing
music, to the Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be
paired to the Uconnect Phone to communicate with the
Uconnect system.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth® but-
ton on the left side of the touchscreen or under the
Source Select/Select Source button (if equipped).
AUX MODE
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX
device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the
AUX port,
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the Auxiliary
device cable into the AUX port. If you insert an Auxiliary
device with the ignition and the radio on, the unit will
switch to AUX Mode and begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX
device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the
AUX port
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output
from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the volume con-
trol on the Auxiliary device is set too low, there will be
insufficient audio signal for the radio unit to play the
music on the device.
Seek Up
/Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the touch-
screen for the next selection on the USB device. Press
and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen
to return to the beginning of the current selection, or to
return to the beginning of the previous selection if the
USB device is within the first three seconds of the cur-
rent selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek Up
button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the
Bluetooth® device. Press and release the Seek Down
button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the Bluetooth® device is within the
first second of the current selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the touch-
screen to display the browse window. In USB Mode, the
left side of the browse window displays a list of ways
you can browse through the contents of the USB device.
If supported by the device, you can browse by Folder,
Artist, Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired but-
ton on the touchscreen on the left side of the screen.
The center of the browse window shows items and their
158 MULTIMEDIA
sub-functions, which can be scrolled through by press-
ing the Up and Down buttons to the right. The TUNE/
SCROLL knob can also be used to scroll.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the touch-
screen to select the desired audio source: USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the touch-
screen to select the desired audio source: AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the touch-
screen to toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat
button on the touchscreen is highlighted when active.
The Radio will continue to play the current track,
repeatedly, as long as the repeat is active. Press the
Repeat button again to enter Repeat All. The radio will
continue to play all the current tracks, repeatedly, as
long as the repeat function is active. To cancel Repeat,
press the Repeat button a third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the touch-
screen to play the selections on the USB device in ran-
dom order to provide an interesting change of pace.
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen a second
time to turn this feature off.
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the Audio
button
page 154.
Info
In USB Mode, press the Info button on the touchscreen
to display the current track information. Press the Info
or X button on the touchscreen a second time to cancel
this feature.
Tracks
In USB Mode, press the Tracks button on the touch-
screen to display a pop-up with the Song List. The song
currently playing is indicated by an arrow and lines
above and below the song title. When in the Tracks List
screen you can rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob to high-
light a track (indicated by the line above and below the
track name) and then push the ENTER/BROWSE knob
to start playing that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device supports
this feature, press the Tracks button on the touch-
screen to display a pop-up with the Song List. The cur-
rently playing song is indicated by a red arrow and lines
above and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while
the pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.
MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®, and
auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button
located on the steering wheel.
After the beep, say one of the following commands and
follow the prompts to switch your media source or
choose an artist:
•
“ Change source to Bluetooth®”
•
“ Change source to AUX”
•
“ Change source to USB”
•
“ Play artist Beethoven”; “ Play album Greatest
Hits”; “ Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “ Play genre
Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the touch-
screen to see all of the music on your USB device. Your
Voice Command must match exactly how the artist,
album, song, and genre information is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free,
in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to dial
a phone number with your mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
•
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith
Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
•
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your incoming
SMS messages.
•
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward one of
18 predefined SMS messages to incoming calls/text
messages.
•
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
•
Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”).
•
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming Calls,”
“Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed Calls,” or
“Show Recent Calls”).
•
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for
John Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
•
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
•
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis-
played on the touchscreen.
•
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
•
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
•
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS Messages.
•
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy
access to connect to them quickly.
MULTIMEDIA 159
5
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically
mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
•
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call 877-855-8400
•
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-387-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system's
microphone for private conversation.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all
risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
The Phone feature is driven through your Bluetooth®
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Bluetooth® technology — the global standard that
enables different electronic devices to connect to each
other without wires or a docking station. Ensure you
phone is turned on with Bluetooth® active and has
been paired to the Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile
phones or audio devices are allowed to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and
one audio device can be used with the system at a
time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel is
used to get into the Phone Mode and make
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing
calls, view phonebook, etc. When you push
the button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your signal
to give a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your steering
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when
you are already in a call or want to make
another call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used to
access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice
Command features if your vehicle is equipped.
Phone Operation
OPERATION
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
Phone and to navigate its menu structure. Voice com-
mands are required after most Uconnect Phone
prompts. There are two general methods for how Voice
Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith
mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system
to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or
another prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can
be used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and
then “John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John Smith
mobile.”
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts
and say each part of the command when you are
asked for it. For example, you can use the com-
pound command form voice command “Search for
John Smith,” or you can break the compound com-
mand form into two voice commands: “Search Con-
tacts” and when asked, “John Smith.” Please
remember, the Uconnect Phone works best when
you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if
speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away
from you.
NATURAL SPEECH
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Lan-
guage Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen-
tence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call
was requested but the specific name was not
recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the system
requires more information from the user, it will ask a
160 MULTIMEDIA
question to which the user can respond without push-
ing the Voice Command button on the steering wheel.
HELP COMMAND
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push
the Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel and
say a command or say “Help”. All Phone sessions begin
with a push of the VR button or the Phone button.
CANCEL COMMAND
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone button on
your steering wheel when the system is listening for a
command and be returned to the main or previous
menu.
PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
PHONE
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
To begin using your Uconnect Phone,
you must pair your compatible
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Mobile phone pairing is the process of
establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your mobile phone’s manual. Please visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone
compatibility information.
NOTE:
•
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone
to complete this procedure.
•
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow these steps to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
○
If there are no phones currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you
would like to pair a mobile phone.
○
This pop-up only appears when the user enters
Phone Mode and no other device(s) have previ-
ously been paired. If the system has a phone
previously paired, even if no phone is currently
connected with the system, this pop-up will not
appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
○
Press the Settings button on your mobile phone.
○
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is enabled.
Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to
search for Bluetooth® connections.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the PIN
from the pop-up on your mobile phone.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to pair a
mobile phone, press the Phone Pairing or Settings
button from the Uconnect Phone main screen.
○
Press
○
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. When
prompted on the phone, select “Uconnect” and
accept the connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress screen
while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect sys-
tem, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the
connection request from Uconnect.
9. When the pairing process has successfully com-
pleted, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting
“Yes” will make this phone the highest priority. This
phone will take precedence over other paired
phones within range and will connect to the
Uconnect system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected to the
Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected, sim-
ply select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/audio
device Bluetooth® screen, and the Uconnect system
will reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which it
was paired. The most recent phone paired will have
the higher priority.
Scan me
MULTIMEDIA 161
5
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up
on your mobile phone for the Uconnect system to
access your “messages” and “contacts”. Selecting “Ok”
or “Allow” will sync your contacts with the Uconnect
system.
You can also use the VR command “Show Paired
Phones” to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any
screen on the radio.
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect sys-
tem may interfere with the Bluetooth® connection. If
this happens, simply repeat the pairing process. How-
ever, first make sure to delete the device from the list of
phones on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the high-
est priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within
range. If you need to choose a particular phone or
audio device follow these steps:
1. Press the button on the touchscreen.
2. Press .
3. Press to select the particular phone or the particular
audio device. A pop-up menu will appear; press
“Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR
AUDIO DEVICE
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
button.
2. Press .
3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the
device name for a different phone or audio device
than the currently connected device or press the
preferred Connected Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete Device
button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
FAVORITE
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen, press
the Settings button located to the right of the device
name for a different phone or audio device than the
currently connected device or press the preferred
“Connected Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the touchscreen;
you will see the chosen device move to the top of
the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC
PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE
PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has the
ability to download contact names and number entries
from the mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific
Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook Access Profile may
support this feature. Your mobile phone may receive a
pop-up asking for permission for the Uconnect system
to access your messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok”
or “Allow” will sync your contacts with the Uconnect
system.
See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com, for
supported phones.
•
To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone-
book
page 165.
•
Automatic download and update of a phonebook, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wire-
less phone connection is made to the Uconnect
Phone, for example, after you start the vehicle.
•
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four num-
bers per contact will be downloaded and updated
every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect
Phone.
•
Depending on the maximum number of entries
downloaded, there may be a short delay before the
latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if
available, the previously downloaded phonebook is
available for use.
•
Only the phonebook of the currently connected
mobile phone is accessible.
162 MULTIMEDIA
•
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED
There are two ways you can add an entry to your favor-
ites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press the
Favorites button on the touchscreen, and then press
one of the +Add Favorite Contact buttons that
appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select “Con-
tacts” from the Phone main screen, and then select
the appropriate number. Press the Down Arrow but-
ton or the Settings Gear button next to the selected
number to display the option’s pop-up. In the pop-
up, select “Add to Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from the
Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the Settings
Gear icon next to the contact you want to remove
from your favorites. This will bring up the options for
that Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available and sup-
ported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan. For
example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way
calling, this feature can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone. Check with your mobile service pro-
vider for the features that you have.
Here are the phone options with Uconnect:
•
Redial
•
Dial by pressing in the number
•
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
•
Favorites
•
Mobile Phonebook
•
Recent Call Log
•
SMS Message Viewer
CALL CONTROLS
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
features:
Other phone call features include:
•
End Call
•
Hold/Unhold/Resume
•
Swap two active calls
KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to
enter the number and press “Dial/Call”.
RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
•
All Calls
•
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
•
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
•
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent Calls
button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your steering wheel
and perform the operation. For example, say “Show my
incoming calls”.
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system.
Push the Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen.
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Push the Phone button on the steering
wheel, press the Answer button on the touchscreen, or
press the Caller ID box to place the current call on hold
and answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect system
in the market today do not support rejecting an incom-
ing call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the
user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
MULTIMEDIA 163
5
DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your conve-
nience, there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while Do Not Disturb is
active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text mes-
sage, a call, or both when declining an incoming call
and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
•
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
•
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, “Conference Call” can be
selected so you can still place a second call without
being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
•
Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhone® devices.
•
Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® Message Access
Profile (MAP).
PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold
button on the Phone main screen.
MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT
CALL IS IN PROGRESS
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold button
on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from the
keypad (if supported by your mobile phone), recent
calls, SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks.
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the Swap Calls button on the phone main screen.
Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle between
the active and held phone call.
JOIN CALLS
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the Phone
main screen to combine all calls into a conference call.
CALL TERMINATION
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the End
Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone End button
on the steering wheel. Only the active call(s) will be ter-
minated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the
new active call.
REDIAL
Push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last num-
ber that was dialed from your mobile phone.
CALL CONTINUATION
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on
the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system
until the phone becomes out of range for the
Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to press the
Transfer button on the touchscreen when leaving the
vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
PHONE
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your mobile phone without terminating the
call. To transfer an ongoing call from your connected
mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa,
press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About
Uconnect Phone
VOICE COMMAND
For the best performance:
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away
from you
•
Ensure that no one other than you is speaking dur-
ing a voice command period
•
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
•
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
•
Low Road Noise
•
Smooth Road Surface
•
Fully Closed Windows
•
Dry Weather Conditions
164 MULTIMEDIA
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel.
You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect features and appli-
cations in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Even though the system is designed for many lan-
guages and accents, the system may not always work
for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names in your
Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized when
the entries are not similar. You can say “O” (letter “O”)
for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number com-
binations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
combinations may not be supported.
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
•
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
•
Low Road Noise
•
Smooth Road Surface
•
Fully Closed Windows
•
Dry Weather Conditions
•
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by low-
ering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illumi-
nated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility
and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
and wait for the beep to
say a command. Here are some examples:
•
“ Call John Smith”
•
“ Dial 123 456 7890”
•
“ Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
•
“ Call back” (call previously answered incoming
phone number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command, push
the Phone button
and say “ Call”, then pronounce
the name exactly as it appears in your phonebook.
When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can
say “ Call John Smith work”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce incoming text messages. Push
the VR button
or Phone button and say:
1. “ Listen” to have the system read an incoming text
message. (Must have compatible mobile phone
paired to Uconnect system.)
2. “ Reply” after an incoming text message has been
read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep,
repeat one of the predefined messages and follow
the system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you?
Iwillbe5<or
10, 15, 20, 25,
30, 45, 60>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you later.
I need
directions.
Seeyouin5
<or 10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45, 60>
minutes.
I’monmyway.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided table.
Otherwise, the system will not transpose the message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the full
implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP)
to take advantage of this feature. For details about
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading incom-
ing text messages only. For further information on how
to enable this feature on your Apple® iPhone®, refer to
your iPhone® “User Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri® Eyes
Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected to
your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use your voice
to send text messages, select media, place phone calls
and much more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and responds back to con-
MULTIMEDIA 165
5
firm your requests. The system is designed to keep your
eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel by letting
Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering
wheel. After you hear a double beep, you can ask Siri to
play podcasts and music, get directions, read text mes-
sages, and many other useful requests.
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK
Mobile phones may lose connection to the Uconnect
Phone. When this happens, the connection can gener-
ally be re-established by restarting the mobile phone.
Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth® ON Mode.
POWER-UP
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language change,
you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the
system
page 310.
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
IF EQUIPPED
IS MY VEHICLE CONNECTED?
If equipped, vehicles with an ASSIST and an SOS but-
ton are connected vehicles. These buttons will be
located on either the rearview mirror or overhead con-
sole, depending on the vehicle. If these buttons are
present in your vehicle, you have a connected radio
and can take advantage of the many connected
vehicle features.
For further information about the ASSIST and SOS but-
tons
page 237.
INTRODUCTION TO CONNECTED
VEHICLE SERVICES
One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s Uconnect
system is that you can now take advantage of Brand
Connect connected services. To unlock the full potential
of Brand Connect in your vehicle, you first need to acti-
vate Brand Connect connected services.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Only
use and interact with the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in a collision and death or serious per-
sonal injury.
NOTE:
Brand Connect involves the collection, transmission
and use of data from your vehicle
page 179.
Brand Connect Contact Information
Brand Connect/Care
•
US residents visit: https://www.driveuconnect.com/
or call 1-833-616-7527
•
Canadian residents visit:
https://www.driveuconnect.ca/en or call
1-833-648-1611
What Is Brand Connect?
Brand Connect uses an embedded device in the
Uconnect system installed in your vehicle, which
receives GPS signals and communicates with the Brand
Connect Customer Care center via wireless and land-
line communications networks. Depending on the type
of device in your vehicle, some Brand Connect con-
nected services require an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network compatible with your device. Brand
Connect is available only on equipped vehicles pur-
chased within the continental United States, Alaska,
Hawaii, Puerto Rico and Canada.
NOTE:
•
Certain Brand Connect connected services are
dependent upon an operative telematics device, a
cellular connection, navigation map data, and GPS
satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability
to reach the response center or reach emergency
support.
•
Not all features of Brand Connect are available
everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas.
•
Other factors outside the control of Brand Connect
that may limit or prevent service delivery are hills,
structures, buildings, tunnels, weather, damage to
the electrical system or other important parts of
your vehicle, network congestion, civil disturbances,
actions of third parties or the government, Internet
failure, and/or the physical location of your vehicle,
such as in an underground parking structure or
under a bridge.
Not all Brand Connect features are available for all
models.
166 MULTIMEDIA
Brand Connect provides:
•
The ability to remotely lock/unlock and remote start
your vehicle from virtually anywhere by using the
Vehicle Branded App or your computer.
•
If equipped — Send & Go capability with the Vehicle
Branded App. Use the Vehicle Branded App to easily
search, map and send your locations directly to your
Uconnect Navigation.
•
The ability to locate your vehicle, when you forget
where you parked, using the Vehicle Finder function
of the Vehicle Branded App.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the easy-to-
use Uconnect system and Brand Connect connected
services.
The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your Rearview
Mirror Or Overhead Console
If equipped, the ASSIST Button is used for contacting
Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, and
Brand Connect Customer Care. The SOS Call button
connects you directly to Brand Connect Customer Care
for assistance in an emergency.
Activation — If Equipped
To unlock the full potential of Brand Connect in your
vehicle, you must activate your Brand Connect con-
nected services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of
apps.
3. For customers in the United States, select “Cus-
tomer Care” to speak with a Brand Connect Cus-
tomer Care agent who will activate services in your
vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate on the
web.
For customers in Canada, enter your email address
to activate services in your vehicle.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included trial*
period for use of Brand Connect connected services
starting on the date of vehicle purchase. To get started
with your trial, enrollment in Brand Connect is required.
* Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
Features And Packages
After the trial period, you must purchase a subscription
to continue your services by calling a Brand Connect
Customer Care agent.
GETTING STARTED WITH
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES
Download The Vehicle Branded App
Once you have activated your services, you’re only a few
steps away from using connected services.
•
Download the Vehicle Branded App to your mobile
device.
•
Use your Owner Account login and password to open
the app and then set up a PIN.
•
For customers in the United States, if your vehicle is
not registered at the dealership, you will have to call
the Customer Care call center from inside your
vehicle or press the in-vehicle registration button.
From there, you will be able to register your vehicle
and add your vehicle’s VIN to your account.
•
For customers in Canada, register your account via
your vehicle.
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom menu bar.
b. Press the Activate Services button from the
apps list.
c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confirmation
email will be sent to the provided email address.
d. Press “Continue Activation” from the confirma-
tion email. It may take a short time before
remote services will be available, but you will be
able to log into the Vehicle Branded App and the
Owner’s Site.
MULTIMEDIA 167
5
•
Once on the Remote screen and you have set up
your four-digit PIN, you can begin using Remote Door
Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and activate
your horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
•
Press the Location button on the bottom menu bar
of the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle
or send a location to your Mobile Navigation,
if equipped.
•
Press the Settings side menu in the upper left cor-
ner of the app to bring up app settings and access
the Assist Call Centers.
Using Your Owner’s Site
Your Owner’s Site website
https://www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents), or
www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) provides you with
all the information you need, all in one place. You can
track your service history, find recommended
accessories for your vehicle, watch videos about your
vehicle's features, and easily access your manuals. It is
also where you can manage your Brand Connect
account. This section will familiarize you with the key
elements of the website that will help you get the most
of your Brand Connect connected services.
For customers in the United States, press the Sign
In/Register button and enter your email address and
password.
For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle button.
Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle Health Report”, and
“Recalls”. The website will then prompt you to log in
using your email address and password.
•
Edit/Edit Profile:
To manage the details of your Brand Connect
account, such as your contact information, pass-
word and Brand Connect PIN, click on the Edit/Edit
Profile button to access the details of your account.
•
Connected Services Status:
This statement will indicate your Brand Connect-
equipped vehicle.
•
Remote Commands:
For vehicles with an active Brand Connect subscrip-
tion, press one of these icons and enter your four-
digit Brand Connect Security PIN to remotely start
(if equipped), lock/unlock doors or sound the horn
and flash the lights.
Editing Your Notifications
Notifications are an important element of your Brand
Connect account. For example, any time you use your
remote services (such as Remote Door Unlock), you can
elect to receive a text message, push notification,
and/or E-mail to notify you of the event. To set up the
notifications, please follow these instructions.
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at
https://www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents)
and select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca
(Canadian Residents), select “My Vehicle” and then
“Dashboard”.
2. Select “MY ACCOUNT”.
3. Once there, select “Brand Connect” where you can
edit Notification Preferences.
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email address
to notify you, and you can customize the types of
messages.
USING BRAND CONNECT
SOS Call — If Equipped
WARNING!
Some Brand Connect connected services, including
SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call, will NOT work
without a network connection compatible with your
device.
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A
Button
Center Light Status Description
Off No call activated
Green Active call in progress
Red System error
Brand Connect In-Vehicle Assistance Features
With Brand Connect, your vehicle has onboard assis-
tance features located on the rearview mirror or over-
head console designed to enhance your driving experi-
ence if you should ever need assistance or support.
Description
SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in contact with
a Brand Connect Customer Care agent in the event of
an emergency. When the connection between the
vehicle and the live agent is made, your vehicle will
automatically transmit location information. In the
event of a minor collision, medical or any other emer-
gency, press the SOS button to be connected to a call
center agent who can send emergency assistance to
your vehicle’s location.
168 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Certain Brand Connect connected services are depen-
dent on an operational Uconnect system, cellular net-
work availability that is compatible with the device in
your vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all fea-
tures of Brand Connect are available everywhere at all
times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
How It Works
1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator light will turn
green indicating a call has been placed.
NOTE:
○
In case the SOS Call button is accidentally
pushed, there is a 10-second delay before the
SOS call is placed. The system will verbally alert
you that a call is about to be made. To cancel the
SOS Call connection, push the SOS Call button
on the rearview mirror or overhead console or
press the Cancel button on the touchscreen
within 10 seconds.
○
During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth®-paired
phone is disconnected so incoming or outgoing
calls will go through your mobile device versus
the hands-free system which is not available due
to the SOS Call.
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a Brand
Connect Customer Care agent is made, the agent
will stay on the line with you.
NOTE:
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the Brand
Connect Customer Care center may be recorded or
monitored for quality assurance purposes. Through
your enrollment in and use of the Brand Connect
connected services, you consent to being recorded.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US and that
travel into Mexico and Canada may have limited ser-
vices. In particular, responses to SOS calls or other
emergency services may be unavailable or very limited.
Vehicles purchased outside the United States and
Canada are unable to receive Brand Connect con-
nected services.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected:
•
The light will continuously be illuminated red.
•
The screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
•
An in-vehicle audio message will state “Vehicle
phone requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not lim-
ited to, the following factors:
•
The ignition key is in OFF position.
•
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
•
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
•
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware is
damaged during a vehicle crash.
•
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) coverage and/or GPS
signals are unavailable or obstructed.
•
Network congestion.
•
Weather conditions.
•
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
If your vehicle loses battery power for any reason
(including during or after an accident), the SOS Call
system, among other vehicle systems, will not operate.
Requirements
•
This feature is available only on vehicles sold in the
US or Canada.
•
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Brand
Connect connected services. Vehicle must be regis-
tered with Brand Connect and have an active sub-
scription that includes the applicable feature.
•
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network connection compatible with your
device.
•
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC
(Accessory) position with a properly functioning elec-
trical system.
WARNING!
•
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and
GPS signal reception, which can prevent your
vehicle from placing an emergency call.
•
Do not add any aftermarket electrical equipment to
the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent
your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an
emergency call. To avoid interference that can
cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add after-
market equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB
radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electri-
cal system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES POWER FOR ANY REASON
(Continued)
MULTIMEDIA 169
5
WARNING!
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT),
NEITHER THE VEHICLE BRANDED APPS NOR THE
BRAND CONNECT CONNECTED SERVICES WILL
OPERATE.
•
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the air bag system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi-
nated, the air bag system may not be working prop-
erly and the SOS Call system may not be able to
send a signal to the Brand Connect Customer Care
center. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service your vehicle
immediately.
•
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services if needed. If the
Rearview Mirror Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the SOS Call system
immediately.
•
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
Brand Connect Customer Care agent. All occu-
pants should exit the vehicle immediately and
move to a safe location.
•
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and
regular inspection of your vehicle may result in
vehicle damage, accident or injury.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that
your vehicle’s airbags deploy. After an accident, a live
agent will contact you through the Uconnect system
and alert emergency services.
NOTE:
An active Brand Connect subscription is required for
this feature to function.
After a crash where the airbags deploy:
1. Automatic SOS will initiate a call with an agent.
2. An agent will receive the call and confirm the loca-
tion of the emergency.
3. If needed, the agent will request the assistance of
emergency services.
4. First responders will arrive on scene. The agent will
remain on the call until emergency services arrive.
NOTE:
•
Agents are available 24/7 to assist you in the case
of an emergency.
•
On your behalf, agents are able to notify family
members about the collision.
•
Agents can brief first responders of the situation
before they arrive on scene.
•
In the event vehicle occupants are unable to speak,
emergency services will be dispatched based on the
last known GPS coordinates.
•
Brand Connect connected services are dependent
upon an operative telematics device, a cellular con-
nection, navigation map data, and GPS satellite
reception, which can limit the ability to reach the
response center or reach emergency support.
•
Terms of service of the Uconnect and the Brand
Connect subscriber agreement apply. See terms of
services for complete service limitation.
Remote Commands
On the Remote Commands screen, you have access to
several vehicle features that can be controlled remotely
from your mobile device. These features include
locking/unlocking, remote starting, and activating the
horn and lights of the vehicle.
Lock Press this button to lock
your vehicle.
Vehicle Start Press this button to start
your vehicle.
Horn & Lights Press this button to
sound the horn and acti-
vate your lights.
Unlock Press this button to
unlock your vehicle.
Cancel Vehicle Start Press this button to can-
cel remote start.
Remote Commands lets you send a request to your
vehicle in one of three ways:
•
Anywhere using your mobile device and Vehicle
Branded App
•
From your computer on the Owner’s Site (not avail-
able on all functions)
170 MULTIMEDIA
•
Contacting Brand Connect Customer Care (not avail-
able on all functions)
Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile
Device And The Vehicle Branded App
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon on your
mobile device.
2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your Brand
Connect Security PIN (this is the same four-digit
code established when you activated your con-
nected services). Enter the Security PIN on the
keypad.
3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the command to
go through to your vehicle.
4. A message will let you know if the command was
received by your vehicle.
Using A Remote Command Through Your Owner’s Site
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the username and
password you used when activating your connected
services in your vehicle.
NOTE:
If you forgot your username or password, links are
provided on the website to help you retrieve them.
2. If you have more than one vehicle registered into
your Owner’s Site, select the vehicle you want to
send the command to by clicking on its image along
the top.
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote commands.
Press the desired icon to activate that feature.
4. You will then be asked to enter your Security PIN
(this is the same four-digit code established when
you activated your connected services). Please enter
your Security PIN.
5. A message will appear on the screen to let you know
if the command was received by your vehicle.
Contacting Customer Care (for example, in case of an
accidental lock-out):
1. Contact Customer Care if you are unable to lock
your vehicle through the Vehicle Branded App or
your key fob.
2. For security purposes, the Customer Care agent will
verify your identity by asking for your four-digit Secu-
rity PIN.
3. After providing your Security PIN, you can ask them
to perform a remote command.
NOTE:
Anyone with access to your PIN may request Remote
Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsibility to protect
your PIN appropriately.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Description
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides you the
ability to lock or unlock the door on your vehicle without
the keys and from virtually any distance.
Working Vehicle Conditions
•
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
•
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower
reception.
•
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
Requirements
•
Vehicle must be properly equipped with Brand
Connect.
•
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network connection. If using the Vehicle
Branded App to command your vehicle, your device
must be compatible and be connected to an oper-
able LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
connection.
•
Vehicle must be registered with Brand Connect and
have an active subscription that includes the appli-
cable feature.
•
An ignition cycle is required for some remote com-
mands, such as Remote Vehicle Start and Remote
Door Lock/Unlock if following a Remote Horn &
Lights activation.
•
Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will not be
processed if the vehicle is in motion, the ignition key
is on or during an emergency call.
NOTE:
All other remote services should be performed via your
Owner’s Site or through the Vehicle Branded App on
your compatible device.
Remote Vehicle Start
Description
The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you with the
ability to start the engine on your vehicle without the
keys and from virtually any distance. Once started, the
preset climate controls in your vehicle can warm up or
cool down the interior.
You can also send a command to turn off an engine
that has been started using Remote Vehicle Start. After
15 minutes, if you have not entered your vehicle with
the key, the engine will shut off automatically.
This remote function requires your vehicle to be
equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start system.
MULTIMEDIA 171
5
You can set up push notifications every time a com-
mand is sent to activate or cancel Remote Start.
Working Vehicle Conditions
•
The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode.
•
The vehicle has been started with the key fob within
the last 14 days.
•
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
•
The vehicle’s security system has been armed and
not triggered since the last vehicle start.
•
The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are closed.
•
The vehicle’s check engine light must be off.
•
The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank of
fuel, along with oil and battery power.
•
The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off.
•
If equipped, the vehicle must have an automatic
transmission.
•
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower
reception.
•
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
•
If the Panic button has been pressed, the vehicle
must be started at least once after alarming the
system.
NOTE:
The Brand Connect Customer Care agents are not
authorized for Remote Vehicle Start services. Contact
the Uconnect Care Team for assistance.
Remote Horn & Lights
Description
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy
parking area by activating the horn and lights. It may
also help if you need to draw attention to your vehicle
for any reason.
If you want, you can set up push notifications every
time a command is sent to turn on the horn and lights.
Working Vehicle Conditions
•
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
•
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower
reception.
•
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
NOTE:
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed to be
loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind the sur-
roundings when using this feature. You are responsible
for compliance with local laws, rules and ordinances in
the location of your vehicle when using Remote Horn &
Lights.
Assist — If Equipped
Description
Vehicles equipped with the Brand Connect connected
services feature may contain an ASSIST button in the
vehicle. Once your Brand Connect connected services
have been activated, the ASSIST button can connect
you directly to the Customer Care call center
(if equipped). You will be directed to one of the following
four services:
•
Roadside Assistance — If you get a flat tire or need
a tow, you’ll be connected to someone who can help
anytime.
•
Connected Services — Contact the Brand Connect
Customer Care call center to activate your services,
renew after your trial has expired, for in-vehicle sup-
port for your Brand Connect connected services, or
help answering any general questions surrounding
your connected services.
•
Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all non-
connected Uconnect system features, such as radio
and Bluetooth® connections.
•
Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle.
Brand Connect In-Vehicle Assistance Features —
If Equipped
With Brand Connect, your vehicle has onboard assis-
tance features located on the rearview mirror or over-
head console designed to enhance your driving experi-
ence if you should ever need assistance or support.
How It Works
Simply push the ASSIST button in the vehicle and you
will be presented with your ASSIST options on the
touchscreen. Make your selection by pressing the
touchscreen.
Requirements
•
This feature is available only on vehicles sold in the
US and Canada.
•
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Brand
Connect connected services.
•
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network connection.
•
Vehicle must be registered with Brand Connect and
have an active subscription that includes the appli-
cable feature.
•
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC
(Accessory) position with a properly functioning elec-
trical system.
172 MULTIMEDIA
Disclaimers
If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your vehicle,
you agree to be responsible for any additional roadside
assistance service costs that you may incur. In order to
provide Brand Connect connected services to you, we
may record and monitor your conversations with Road-
side Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, or
Brand Connect Customer Care, whether such conversa-
tions are initiated through the Brand Connect con-
nected services in your vehicle, or via a landline or
mobile device, and may share information obtained
through such recording and monitoring in accordance
with regulatory requirements. You acknowledge, agree
and consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing of
information obtained through any such call recordings.
Send & Go — If Equipped
Description
The Send & Go feature allows you to search for a desti-
nation on your mobile device, and then send the route
to your vehicle’s Navigation system.
How It Works
1. There are multiple ways to find a destination. After
selecting the Location tab at the bottom of the App,
browse through one of the categories provided, or
type the name or keyword in the search box. You can
also select categories such as “Favorites” or “Con-
tact List”.
2. Select your destination from the list that appears.
Location information will then be displayed on the
map.
From this screen, you will be able to:
○
View the location on a map.
○
See the distance from your current location.
○
Send the destination to the vehicle (Send & Go).
3. Send the destination to the Uconnect Navigation in
your vehicle. You can also call the destination by
pressing the Call button.
4. Confirm your destination in the vehicle through a
notification or in the Navigation system.
Requirements
•
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network connection compatible with your
device.
•
Vehicle must have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle Finder
Description
The Vehicle Finder feature allows you to find the loca-
tion of your vehicle.
You can also sound the horn and flash the lights to
make finding your vehicle even easier.
How It Works
Select the Vehicle Finder function within the Vehicle
Branded App and select the Location tab at the bottom
of the App. Then, press the Vehicle icon to find your
vehicle.
Requirements
•
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
•
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network connection compatible with your
device.
•
Vehicle must have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
•
Vehicle ignition must have been turned on within
14 days.
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped
Description
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that connects
your device to an LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
that is ready to go wherever you are. After you've made
your purchase, turn on your device’s Wi-Fi and connect
your devices.
•
Enables all your passengers to be simultaneously
connected to the web.
•
Connect several devices at one time.
•
Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop or any
other portable-enabled media — can connect over
your private in-vehicle network.
•
A high-speed, secured connection lets anyone on
your private network access the Web — great for
working and relaxing.
WARNING!
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot
while driving the vehicle as doing so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your Vehicle
How It Works
The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides the
vehicle passengers with an internet access
hotspot in the vehicle, using the radio as an
access point. The hotspot will allow Wi-Fi-
enabled in-vehicle devices (such as a laptop or any
MULTIMEDIA 173
5
other portable-enabled media device) to wirelessly con-
nect to the internet. Uconnect offers a complimentary
3-month trial period that includes 1GB of total data.
The trial can be activated any time within the first year
of new vehicle ownership.
Use one of these three ways to purchase a subscription
to the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:
1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select the 4G Wi-Fi
Hotspot App, and press the How To Purchase button
and follow the instructions.
2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link to the
AT&T portal to get set up.
3. For existing Connected Car customers: Push the
ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T Customer
Care agent who will assist you.
Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you can
change its name and the password by selecting the
Wi-Fi Hotspot App and pressing the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot
button. You can also view the connected devices from
the app screen by pressing the View Connected Devices
button.
NOTE:
A Brand Connect subscription is not required in order to
purchase and use 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot. For more informa-
tion on setting up a Wi-Fi connection, visit
https://myvehicle.att.com.
WARNING!
Always drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel and obey all applicable laws. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to the use
of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications in this vehicle when
it is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result in an
accident involving in serious injury or death.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If Equipped
Description
If your vehicle is stolen, the Brand Connect Customer
Care agent may be able to locate the stolen vehicle and
work with law enforcement to help recover it.
How It Works
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law enforce-
ment as soon as possible. They will work with you to
file a stolen vehicle report.
2. Next, inform Brand Connect Customer Care that
your vehicle has been stolen.
The Brand Connect Customer Care Agent will ask for
the stolen vehicle report number (as issued by your
local law enforcement). If you have downloaded the
Vehicle Branded App, you can push the Settings
menu button on your device, select “Help”, and then
select “Brand Connect Customer Care” to make the
call.
3. Brand Connect Customer Care will authenticate that
you are the owner of the vehicle and contact the law
enforcement with whom you filed the stolen vehicle
report.
4. Brand Connect Customer Care will work with your
local law enforcement to locate the vehicle. You will
be contacted by law enforcement if your vehicle is
recovered. While the investigation is ongoing, you
should also contact your insurance company to
inform it of the situation.
Requirements
•
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
•
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network connection compatible with your
device.
•
Vehicle must be registered with Brand Connect and
have an active subscription that includes the appli-
cable feature.
NOTE:
Not all features of Brand Connect are available
everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas.
Monthly Vehicle Health Report —
If Equipped
Description
Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect service
through which a summary of the performance of your
vehicle’s key systems will be sent to you every month so
you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance
needs. This is provided as a convenience to you and
does not substitute for regular maintenance to your
vehicle.
174 MULTIMEDIA
In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health Report,
the Uconnect system in your vehicle may collect and
transmit vehicle data to Brand Connect and to FCA,
such as your vehicle’s health and performance, your
vehicle’s location, your utilization of the features in your
vehicle, and other data.
This data collection and transmission begins when you
enroll in Brand Connect and will continue even if you
cancel your Brand Connect subscription unless you call
Brand Connect Customer Care and tell them to deacti-
vate your connected services.
Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more infor-
mation, located at
www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/privacy.html
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian
Residents).
For more information on Brand Connect private policy,
see https://siriusxmcvs.com/privacy-policy.
NOTE:
Your vehicle must be enrolled in an active subscription
with connected services. If you have concerns about
the operation, function or performance of your vehicle,
please take it to an authorized dealer. This report does
not replace regularly scheduled maintenance. Check
the instrument cluster warning lights and cautions in
your vehicle for the most accurate vehicle health
information.
Vehicle Health Alert —If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem with one of your vehicle’s key systems. For fur-
ther information, go to your Owner’s website.
NOTE:
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to register and
activate services. During this process you will be asked
to provide an email address to which the reports will be
sent.
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you notifications to remind you
when services are needed, or to alert you of other
important information, such as recall notices. When you
receive a notification through your touchscreen, press
OK to dismiss the message, or press Call Care to speak
with a Brand Connect Customer Care agent.
NOTE:
Pressing “OK” or the X button on the pop-up screen will
dismiss or close the pop-up, and the In-Vehicle Mes-
sages mailbox will display. In the Mailbox, you can
reopen messages or delete messages.
Amazon Alexa Skill — If Equipped
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to command
your vehicle with Amazon Alexa!
With Amazon Alexa, you can connect to your vehicle and
remotely access key services and features.
If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect Navigation,
you can send a destination directly to your vehicle using
Alexa.
If you need assistance, you can always ask Alexa for
help, or complete a list of commands by saying: “Alexa,
ask <brand name> for help with my car.”
Here are a few of the many questions you can ask
Alexa:
•
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to start my <vehicle
name> with your Voice Code.”
•
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my <vehicle
name> with your Voice Code.”
•
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000 Chrysler
Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my <vehicle
name>.”
•
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel level of
my <vehicle name>.”
An active subscription to Brand Connect is required. To
use Amazon Alexa, first, register for Brand Connect
page 167.
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle to Ama-
zon Alexa:
1. Download the Amazon Alexa app on your mobile
device (Apple® or Android™).
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to SKILLS.
3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap Enable.
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle brand>
Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.
6. Log in using your Owner Account credentials. This
will be the same user name and password you used
when registering for Brand Connect connected ser-
vices. There will be additional settings to confirm on
the following screen.
7. AUTHORIZE the account to return to the <vehicle
brand> Skill.
You can now begin using the <vehicle brand> Skill on
Alexa!
MULTIMEDIA 175
5
Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped
Description
Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving and give
you peace of mind when your loved ones are out on the
road. You can set boundary limits, monitor driving
speed, and pinpoint your vehicle’s location any time,
any place. Use the Vehicle Branded App to set alerts:
•
Boundary Alert
Receive a notification the moment your vehicle is
driven either out of or into a geographic boundary
that you set.
•
Curfew Alert
Receive a notification when your car is being driven
outside of the curfew time.
•
Speed Alert
Receive a notification whenever your car exceeds a
speed limit you set.
•
Valet Alert
Receive a notification if and when your vehicle is
driven outside a quarter-mile radius of a valet drop-
off zone.
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
Description
SmartWatch Integration puts the Vehicle Branded App
right on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear. To get
started, follow these steps:
1. Download the Vehicle Branded App from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone using the
username and password you created when you first
set up your account.
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are con-
nected through Bluetooth®.
4. The Vehicle Branded App should appear on your
SmartWatch.
Once the app is downloaded on your SmartWatch, you
can enjoy these features:
•
Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the remote
lock button in the app and entering your security
PIN.
•
Remote start or stop your vehicle.
•
View important vehicle stats, such as fuel level,
vehicle location, tire pressure warning, and more.
MANAGE MY BRAND CONNECT
ACCOUNT
To manage your Brand Connect account, press the
ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call Brand Connect
Customer Care.
NOTE:
It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or turning
in your lease, to call Brand Connect Care to remove
your personal data.
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQs
For additional information about Brand Connect, active
subscribers can push the ASSIST button (if equipped)
and then select Brand Connect Call on your in-vehicle
touchscreen to contact Brand Connect. Your call will be
directed to a Brand Connect agent or held in a queue
until an agent is available. If you do not have an active
subscription, push the ASSIST button and press the
Activate button on the touchscreen to activate services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SOS
FAQS — IF EQUIPPED
1. What happens if I accidentally push the SOS Call
button on the mirror or overhead console? You have
10 seconds after pushing the SOS Call button to
cancel the call. To cancel the call, either push the
SOS Call button again, or press the Cancel button
on the in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. What type of information is sent when I use the
SOS Call button from my vehicle? Certain vehicle
information, such as make and model, is transmit-
ted along with the last known GPS location.
3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You can use
the SOS Call button to make a call if you or someone
else needs emergency assistance.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FAQS
1. How long does it take to unlock or lock the door?
Depending on various conditions, it can take up to
three minutes or more for the request to get to your
vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Vehicle Branded
App? Your key fob will lock/unlock the door more
quickly, however its range is limited and your Vehicle
Branded App comes in handy for these and other
situations.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device? People
sometimes lose their mobile devices, which is why
security measures have been engineered into the
Vehicle Branded App. Asking for your username,
password and Brand Connect Security PIN are
176 MULTIMEDIA
required for the activation of Remote services
through your mobile device. It is your responsibility
to protect your passwords and PINs.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Vehicle
Branded App? The Vehicle Branded App is compat-
ible with most devices with the Apple® and
Android™ operating systems. The capabilities of
these devices allow us to remotely command your
vehicle. Other operating systems may be supported
in the future.
5. Why is the Vehicle Branded App running slow? The
Vehicle Branded App relies on a mobile network
connection from your device to send commands to
your vehicle which must have an operable LTE
(voice/data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network con-
nection. If either your device or your vehicle is in an
area with below average coverage, it may take lon-
ger to log in and send commands.
CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE
ASSISTANCE FAQS
1. What is the phone number for roadside assistance
call? The phone number is:
○
US: 1-800-521-2779
○
Canada: 1-800-363-4869
2. If I am subscribed to Brand Connect, does it cover
towing or other expenses incurred by using road-
side assistance? No, however your new vehicle may
include Roadside Assistance Call services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & GO
FAQS — IF EQUIPPED
1. How long does it take to send the route and desti-
nation to my vehicle? Depending on various condi-
tions, it can take up to three minutes for the request
to get through to your vehicle.
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once
you enter your vehicle, and start the engine, the
pop-up message stating that you have a new route
will appear. There is an exit button on the pop-up
that will cancel the route if selected.
3. Can I select a different route than the most recent
one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once you enter the
vehicle, and start the engine, the pop-up message
offers a “Locations” option. Once “Locations” is
selected, you can choose from a list of recently sent
destinations.
CONNECTED SERVICES VEHICLE
FINDER FAQS
1. Can someone else locate my vehicle? Your vehicle
may be located by anyone who has your PIN and
access to your account. It is your responsibility to
guard your PIN accordingly. See the Uconnect and
Brand Connect terms of service for more
information.
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and flash
the lights? Depending on various conditions, it can
take three minutes or more for the request to get
through to your vehicle.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn
them on? If you are close enough to the vehicle, you
can use the key fob to turn off the horn and lights by
pushing the red Panic button.
CONNECTED SERVICES STOLEN
VEHICLE ASSISTANCE FAQS —
IF EQUIPPED
1. Can someone locate my vehicle? To enhance your
privacy, and the privacy of others using your vehicle,
a stolen vehicle police report is required for you to
activate this service. You must involve local law
enforcement to have Brand Connect locate your
vehicle. We may also locate the vehicle for other law
enforcement or government agencies, subject to a
valid court order telling Brand Connect to do so. We
will also provide the service for FCA entities to locate
a vehicle that you have purchased through them.
2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered? After you
provide the Brand Connect Customer Care agent
with the stolen vehicle report, the agent will work
together with law enforcement to try to locate your
vehicle. If your vehicle is recovered, you will be con-
tacted by law enforcement.
3. Can Brand Connect lower my insurance rates?
Some insurance providers offer lower rates on
vehicles equipped with systems that can deter auto
theft. When shopping for insurance, be sure to
inform the insurance provider of your Brand Connect
connected services subscription to find out if the
insurance provider can offer you a lower rate.
MULTIMEDIA 177
5
NOTE:
FCA is not an insurance company, and Brand Con-
nect is not an insurance product. You are respon-
sible for obtaining insurance coverage for your
vehicle and yourself.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE
VEHICLE START FAQS
1. How long does it take to remotely start my vehicle?
Depending on various conditions, it can take three
minutes or more for the request to get through to
your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Vehicle Branded
App? Your key fob will remote start your vehicle
more quickly. However its range is limited. For
example, when you are leaving the stadium after the
game, you can use the Vehicle Branded App to
remote start your vehicle and have the inside of your
vehicle comfortable by the time you get to it.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless device?
People sometimes lose their wireless devices, which
is why security measures have been engineered into
the Vehicle Branded App. Asking for your username,
password and Brand Connect Security PIN help to
ensure that nobody can start your vehicle if they
happen to find your device.
4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle using the
App? No. Driving your vehicle still requires the keys
to be in the vehicle. The Remote Start feature simply
starts the engine to warm up or cool down the inte-
rior before you arrive.
5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with the
cancel Remote Vehicle Start command? No. If the
vehicle is in motion, the cancel Remote Vehicle Start
button will not stop the vehicle.
6. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Vehicle
Branded App? The Vehicle Branded App has been
designed to work on most devices with the Apple®
and Android™ operating systems. The capabilities of
these devices allow us to remotely command your
vehicle. Other operating systems may be supported
in the future.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE
HORN & LIGHTS FAQS
1. How long does it take to sound my horn and flash
the lights? Depending on various conditions, it can
take three minutes or more for the request to get
through to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Vehicle Branded
App? Your key fob will sound the horn and flash the
lights quicker; however, its range is limited.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn
them on? If you are close enough to the vehicle, you
can use the key fob to turn off the horn and lights by
pressing the red Panic button. Otherwise, Remote
Horn & Lights will continue for a maximum of three
minutes.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Vehicle
Branded App? The Vehicle Branded App has been
designed to work on most devices with the Apple®
and Android™ operating systems. The capabilities of
these devices allow us to remotely command your
vehicle. Other operating systems may be supported
in the future.
CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT
FAQS — IF EQUIPPED
1. How do I register for my Brand Connect account?
There are three ways that you can register your
Brand Connect Account:
○
Push the ASSIST button. A call will be placed to
an agent who can assist in registering your new
account.
○
Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps
menu. Select the button to speak with an agent,
who can assist in registering your new account.
○
Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps
menu. Enter your email on the touchscreen and
then follow the prompts from the provided email.
You will receive an email with an activation link
that will be good for 72 hours. Once you click the
activation link, you will be prompted to fill out
your information and accept Terms and Condi-
tions. Then, you will be directed to the Brand
Connect home page to complete your profile and
demo the remote services.
2. Why do I need an email address? Without an email
address, customers cannot register for Brand Con-
nect. Customers need to register so they can sub-
scribe to receive additional services and create a
Brand Connect Security PIN for remote command
requests.
3. How do I create a Brand Connect security PIN? Set
up your Brand Connect Security PIN during the regis-
tration process. The Brand Connect Security PIN will
be required to authenticate you when accessing
178 MULTIMEDIA
your account via Brand Connect Call or performing
any remote services, such as Remote Door Lock/
Unlock, Remote Horn & Lights, or Remote Vehicle
Start.
4. What if I forgot my Brand Connect security PIN? If
you’ve already activated services and forgot your
Brand Connect Security PIN, you can reset the PIN
by selecting Edit Profile on your Owner’s Site.
5. How do I update my Brand Connect payment
account address? Your Brand Connect Payment
Account address can be updated online, or by call-
ing Brand Connect Customer Care from ASSIST in
your vehicle. To update online: login to your Owner’s
Site, and select Edit Profile > Brand Connect Pay-
ment Account.
6. How do I update my Brand Connect profile? Your
name, home address, phone number, email address
and Brand Connect Security PIN can be updated
online on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your Owner’s
Site then select Edit Profile to edit your personal
information. Make your edits and click Save.
7. Can I try features or packages before I buy them?
Your new vehicle purchase may have come with an
included trial period for certain Apps and services.
8. Can I access every App and service while driving?
No, some applications and services are not avail-
able while driving. For your own safety, it is not pos-
sible to use some of the touchscreen features while
the vehicle is in motion (e.g. key pad).
9. What happens when my subscription comes up for
renewal? If you have added a credit card to your
account information, your subscription will be auto-
matically renewed for a term length in accordance
with the service plan that you have selected at the
then current subscription rate and on every renewal
date thereafter, unless you cancel your subscription
by calling Brand Connect Care. If you have not
added a credit card to your account, Brand Connect
will send you an email or letter in advance of your
expiration date to remind you that your subscription
is ending soon.
10. How do I manage my Brand Connect notification
preferences? Contact Brand Connect Customer
Care, or go to your Owner’s Site and then update
your preferences on the Brand Connect customer
web portal.
11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact Brand
Connect Customer Care by pushing the ASSIST
button on your rearview mirror or overhead
console.
12. How do I update my credit card information?
Login to your Owner’s Site, and select Edit Profile,
then select Brand Connect Payment Account.
13. How do I find out how much longer I have on my
subscription? Contact Brand Connect Customer
Care.
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and choose a
subscription to view its expiration date. When your
subscription is about to expire, you will receive an
email or letter of notification.
14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire
subscription? Prorated refunds are provided from
the date of cancellation for annual plans or longer.
Please see the Uconnect and Brand Connect
Terms & Conditions for refunds related to billing
plans of other lengths and other circumstances.
15. Can I cancel a subscription before it expires? Yes.
If you have an annual subscription, your subscrip-
tion will be canceled the day you cancel. If you
have a monthly subscription, your subscription will
be canceled on the last day of the month in which
you choose to cancel.
16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle?
Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner, you’ll
want to remove your account information. This pro-
cess removes all personal information, returns the
Uconnect system to its original factory settings,
removes all Brand Connect connected services
and account information. To remove your account
information from the Uconnect system, contact
Brand Connect Customer Care.
17. What if I forgot to remove my account information
before I returned my lease vehicle or sold it? Con-
tact Brand Connect Customer Care.
18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/data),
4G (data), or 5G (data) network connection com-
patible with my device is temporarily unavailable?
The SOS Call and ASSIST buttons will NOT function
if you are not connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data), 5G (data) network. Services
that required your smartphone only direct calls to
Roadside Assistance Call may be functioning if you
have an operable network.
DATA COLLECTION & PRIVACY
The Uconnect system collects and transmits data which
may include information about your vehicle, your vehi-
cle’s health and performance, your vehicle’s location,
your utilization of the features in your vehicle, and other
data. The collection, use and sharing of this information
is required to provide the Brand Connect connected
services and is further described by the Uconnect Pri-
MULTIMEDIA 179
5
vacy Policy, which can be found at
www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/privacy.html
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian
Residents). This information may be collected by
SiriusXM® Connected Vehicle Services Inc. and shared
with FCA US LLC for the purposes stated in the
Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle health and diagnostic
information including location data may be used by
Uconnect to provide a Vehicle Health Report to you.
Even if you cancel your Brand Connect subscription,
this vehicle diagnostic health information, including
location data, may still be transmitted from your
vehicle and you may still have a Vehicle Health Report
sent to you.
Use of any of the connected services including Brand
Connect is deemed to be your consent to the collection,
use and disclosure of this information in accordance
with the Uconnect Privacy Policy. If you do not want this
information to be collected, used, or shared, you must
cancel your Uconnect services in their entirety by con-
tacting us as referenced in the Uconnect Privacy Policy.
PERFORMANCE PAGES
Performance Pages is an application that provides a
display for performance indicators that will help you
gain familiarity with the capabilities of your vehicle in
real time.
To access the Performance Pages, press the Vehicle
button on the touchscreen. Then, press the Perfor-
mance Pages button on the touchscreen. Press the
desired button on the touchscreen to access that spe-
cific Performance Page.
On vehicles equipped with SRT, to access the Perfor-
mance Pages, press the Vehicle button on the touch-
screen. Then, press the SRT tab at the top of the touch-
screen. Selecting the SRT button will bring you to three
different page options: Performance Pages, Drive
Modes, and Race Options. Press the Performance
Pages button and then press the desired button on the
touchscreen to access that specific Performance Page.
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-
mance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public road-
ways. It is recommended that these features be used
in a controlled environment and within the limits of
the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured
by the Performance Pages must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
The Performance Pages include the following:
•
Timers
•
Gauges
•
Dyno/Engine
•
G-Force
•
Vehicle Dynamics
The following describes each feature and its operation:
TIMERS
Timers
When the Timers page is selected, you will be able to
select the Drag or Accel & Braking tab by either press-
ing the Up or Down arrow towards the right side of the
touchscreen, or dragging your finger in an upwards or
downwards motion.
Accel & Braking
•
Recent
A real-time summary of performance timers.
•
Last
The last recorded run of performance timers.
•
Best
The best recorded run of performance timers.
Timers — Accel & Braking
180 MULTIMEDIA
Drag
•
Recent
A real-time summary of performance timers.
•
Last
The last recorded run of performance timers.
•
Best
The best recorded run of performance timers,
except for braking data.
Save
Pressing the Save button will let you save the visible
page, Recent/Last/Best.
NOTE:
Pressing the Snapshot icon in the lower right corner of
the screen at any time will save a screenshot of the
screen currently being viewed to the connected USB
device.
Information about your vehicle appears at the time a
snapshot is taken such as the vehicle’s Vehicle Identifi-
cation Number (VIN), miles on the odometer, longitude
and latitude coordinates, and more.
•
With a USB drive installed, press the USB button to
save to the jump drive.
•
Press the Cancel button to return to the Timers
page.
NOTE:
Snapshot recordings can only be saved onto FAT32 for-
matted USB devices.
The tabs on the Timers page contain the following tim-
ers listed:
•
Reaction Time: Measures the driver's reaction time
for launching the vehicle against a simulated drag
strip timing light (behavior modeled after
500 Sportsman Tree) displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
NOTE:
Drag timers (RT, 60 ft [20 m], 330 ft [100 m], ⅛
mile [200 m], 1000 ft [300 m], and ¼ mile [400 m])
and Acceleration timers (0-60 mph [0-96 km/h] and
0-100 mph [0-160 km/h]) will be ready to acquire
new Recent data measurements when the vehicle is
at 0 mph (0 km/h).
The following timer listed shows estimated timing at
which the time required to travel at the cited distance is
met. Some timers will also display speeds present at
the time the distance was met.
•
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
•
0-100 mph (0-160 km/h)
•
60 ft (20 m) ET
•
330 ft (100 m) ET
•
⅛ Mile + speed (200 m + speed) ET
•
⅛ Mile + speed (200 m + speed) mph
•
1000 ft (300 m) ET
•
¼ Mile + speed (400 m + speed) ET
•
¼ Mile + speed (400 m + speed) mph
•
Brake Distance ft (meters)
NOTE:
The distance measurement will be aborted if the
brake pedal is released, or the parking brake is
engaged, before the vehicle comes to a complete
stop.
•
Brake from mph (km/h)
NOTE:
Brake Distance and Speed timers only displays
“ready” when vehicle is traveling at greater than
30 mph (48 km/h).
•
Brake from km/h
NOTE:
Brake Distance and Speed timers only displays
“ready” when vehicle is traveling at greater than
48 km/h (30mph).
GAUGES
Timers — Drag
Gauges
MULTIMEDIA 181
5
When selected, this screen displays the following val-
ues:
•
Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
•
Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
•
Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
•
Battery Voltage
Shows actual battery voltage.
•
Trans Oil Temp — If Equipped with an Automatic
Transmission
Shows actual transmission oil temperature.
•
Boost Pressure — If Equipped
Shows actual boost pressure.
•
Air Fuel Ratio — If Equipped
Shows current air fuel ratio.
•
I/C Coolant Temp — If Equipped
Shows actual I/C Coolant temperature.
•
Intake Air Temp
Shows actual air intake temperature.
If a gauge is selected, the Gauge Detail View page will
appear on the screen. This page shows gauge values
for the previous two minutes on the selected gauge.
Pressing the Up and Down arrows will cycle through the
details for each of the gauges. Pressing the minimize
button beside the graph will return to the gauge menu.
DYNAMOMETER (DYNO)/ENGINE
Dynamometer (Dyno)
The system will start drawing graphs for Power and
Torque (top chart) and Engine Speed (bottom chart).
The graph will fill from the left side of the x-axis and fill
to the right side of the x-axis (based on History time
selected). Once the right side of the page is reached,
the graph will scroll with the right side always being the
most recent recorded sample.
The following options can be selected:
•
Pressing the STOP button will freeze the graph.
Selecting “Play” will clear the graph and restart the
process over.
•
Press the + or - buttons to change the history of the
graph. The selectable options are “30”, “60”, “90”,
and “120” seconds. The graph will expand or con-
strict depending on the setting selected.
•
Select the Gear display setting to turn the graph
gear markers on and off.
NOTE:
The Gear on/off feature will only display if your vehicle
is equipped with an Automatic Transmission.
Engine
Press the Up and Down arrow buttons on the right side
of the touchscreen to cycle between the Dyno and
Engine pages.
Gauge Detail View Page Dyno
182 MULTIMEDIA
When selected, this screen displays the following val-
ues:
•
Vehicle Speed
Shows the actual vehicle speed.
•
Engine Power
Shows the instantaneous power.
•
Engine Torque
Shows the instantaneous torque.
•
Oil Pressure (6.4L Only) — If Equipped
Shows the actual engine oil pressure.
•
Boost Pressure (6.2 Only) — If Equipped
Shows the actual boost pressure.
•
Gear
Shows the current (or pending) operating gear of the
vehicle.
G-FORCE
When “G-Force” is selected, the following features will
be available:
•
Vehicle Speed
Measures the current speed of the vehicle in
either mph or km/h, starting at zero with no maxi-
mum value.
•
Front G-Force
Measures the peak braking force on the front of the
vehicle.
•
Right G-Force
Measures the peak force on the right side of the
vehicle.
•
Left G-Force
Measures the peak force on the left side of the
vehicle.
•
Rear G-Force
Measures the peak acceleration force on the rear of
the vehicle.
NOTE:
Front, Right, Left, and Rear G-Forces are all peak
values. These readings can be reset by clearing
peak G-Force on the instrument cluster.
The friction circle display shows instantaneous G-Force
as a highlight and previous G-Force as dots within the
circle. The system records previous G-Force for three
minutes. If there are multiple samples at a given point,
the color of the dot will darken from blue to red. Vectors
more frequent will show in red; infrequent vectors will
show in blue.
Pitch & Roll
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current
pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to side)
in degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a visualiza-
tion of the current vehicle angle.
Engine — 6.4L
Engine — 6.2L
G-Force
MULTIMEDIA 183
5
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information con-
cerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
Road Wheel Angle
Road Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to
measure the degree of the steering wheel relative to
zero (straight ahead) reference angle. The zero degree
reference angle measurement indicates a steering
wheel straight ahead position.
SRT DRIVE MODES — IF EQUIPPED
Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a Drive Modes fea-
ture which allows for coordinating the operation of vari-
ous vehicle systems depending upon the type of driving
behavior desired. The Drive Modes feature is controlled
through the touchscreen and may be accessed by per-
forming any of the following:
•
Selecting “Vehicle”, then “Dashboard” and then
“Drive Modes” from the Vehicle menu.
•
Pushing the SRT button located on the instrument
panel switchbank.
The SRT Drive Modes main screen displays the current
drive mode and real-time status of the vehicle’s perfor-
mance configuration. The selectable Drive Modes are
Track, Sport, Auto, Snow, Tow, and Custom. Information
shown will indicate the actual status of each system,
along with a vehicle graphic that displays the active
drive mode status. The color red indicates “Track”,
orange “Sport”, yellow “Street”, blue “Snow”, and
purple “Tow”. These features will reset to AUTO upon an
ignition cycle. If the system status shown does not
match the current drive mode setup, a message will be
displayed indicating which values are not matching the
current mode.
SPORT MODE
Selecting “Sport” on the touchscreen will activate the
configuration for typical enthusiast driving. The Trans-
mission, Stability Control, All-Wheel Drive, Steering, and
Suspension systems are all set to their Sport settings.
The Paddle Shifters are enabled.
TRACK MODE
Vehicle Dynamics
Drive Modes (Sport)
Sport Mode Set-Up
Drive Modes (Track)
184 MULTIMEDIA
Selecting “Track” on the touchscreen will activate the
configuration for typical track driving. The Transmission,
Stability Control, All-Wheel Drive, Steering, and Suspen-
sion systems are all set to their Track settings. The
Paddle Shifters are enabled.
NOTE:
While in Track Mode, Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Full-Off can be activated by pushing and holding the
ESC Off button on the instrument panel switch bank for
five seconds.
TOW MODE
Selecting “Tow” on the touchscreen will activate the
configuration for towing a trailer or hauling heavy loads
in the cargo area. Once in this mode, trailer sway con-
trol is enabled in the ESC system. The Transmission and
Suspension are set to Tow, Stability Control is set to
Full, All-Wheel Drive is set to 50/50, and Steering is set
to Street. Paddle Shifters are enabled.
SNOW MODE
Selecting “Snow” on the touchscreen will activate Snow
Mode for use on loose traction surfaces. When in Snow
Mode (depending on certain operating conditions), the
transmission will use second gear (rather than first
gear) during launches, to minimize wheel slippage. The
Transmission is set to Snow, Stability Control is set to
Full, All-Wheel Drive is set to 50/50, and Steering and
Suspension are set to Street.
Paddle Shifters can be enabled or disabled by pressing
the Snow Set-Up button on the touchscreen.
Track Mode Set-Up
Drive Modes (Tow)
Tow Mode Set-Up
Drive Mode (Snow)
MULTIMEDIA 185
5
AUTO MODE
Auto Mode is enabled upon ignition ON, or by selecting
“Auto” on the touchscreen. The Transmission, Stability
Control, and All-Wheel Drive modes are set to their
Street settings. Steering and Suspension can be config-
ured in Track, Sport, or Street. The Paddle Shifters may
be enabled or disabled while in Auto Mode Set-Up.
CUSTOM MODE
Custom Mode may be selected by pushing the Custom
button on the touchscreen. Custom Mode allows you to
create a custom configuration that is saved for quick
selection of your favorite settings. While in Custom
Mode, the All-Wheel Drive, Stability Control, Transmis-
sion, Steering, and Suspension settings are shown in
their current configuration.
Custom Mode Set-Up Info
Within the Custom Mode Set-Up screen, press the info
button on the touchscreen then use the Left/Right
arrow to scroll through all the available Drive Mode sys-
tems giving you a description of their operation and
current configuration.
Snow Mode Set-Up
Drive Mode Auto (Default)
Auto Mode Set-Up
Drive Mode (Custom)
Custom Mode Set-Up Info Button
186 MULTIMEDIA
Transmission
•
Track
Press the Track button on the touchscreen to pro-
vide the fastest shift speeds with the highest com-
fort trade-off.
•
Sport
Press the Sport button on the touchscreen to pro-
vide faster shift speeds with some comfort trade-off.
•
Street
Press the Street button on the touchscreen to pro-
vide a balance of shift speed and comfort for typical
daily driving.
Paddle Shifters
•
ON
Press the On button on the touchscreen to enable
steering wheel Paddle Shifters.
•
OFF
Press the Off button on the touchscreen to disable
steering wheel Paddle Shifters.
All-Wheel Drive
•
Track
Press the Track button on the touchscreen to pro-
vide the greatest distribution of torque to the rear
wheels (70%).
•
Sport
Press the Sport button on the touchscreen to pro-
vide greater distribution of torque to the rear wheels
(65%).
•
Street
Press the Street button on the touchscreen to pro-
vide moderate distribution of torque to the rear
wheels (60%).
•
50/50
Press the 50/50 button on the touchscreen to pro-
vide even distribution of torque between the front
and rear wheels.
8-Speed Transmission Paddle Shifters All-Wheel Drive
MULTIMEDIA 187
5
Stability Control
•
Track
Press the Track button on the touchscreen to pro-
vide minimal stability control.
NOTE:
The engine torque management portion of traction
control is automatically turned off when TRACK
Mode stability is selected.
•
Sport
Press the Sport button on the touchscreen to pro-
vide reduced stability control.
•
Street
Press the Street button on the touchscreen to pro-
vide full (default) stability control.
Suspension
•
Track
Press the Track button on the touchscreen to pro-
vide the firmest suspension stiffness with the high-
est amount of comfort trade-off.
•
Sport
Press the Sport button on the touchscreen to pro-
vide a firmer suspension stiffness with moderate
comfort trade-off.
•
Street
Press the Street button on the touchscreen to pro-
vide a balance of suspension stiffness and ride
comfort for typical daily driving.
Steering
•
Track
Press the Track button on the touchscreen to adjust
the steering effort and feel to the greatest level.
•
Sport
Press the Sport button on the touchscreen to adjust
the steering effort and feel to a greater level.
•
Street
Press the Street button on the touchscreen to bal-
ance the steering feel and comfort.
RACE OPTIONS
To access the Race Options features, press the Vehicle
button on the touchscreen, then the SRT button, and
lastly the Race Options button to display the vehicle’s
Launch Control screen. Within Race Options, you can
activate, deactivate, and adjust the RPM values for the
Launch Control and Shift Light features
page 190.
Stability Control Suspension Steering
188 MULTIMEDIA
LAUNCH CONTROL
WARNING!
Launch Control is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public road-
ways. It is recommended that this feature be used in
a controlled environment, and within the limits of the
law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by
the performance pages must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system
that is designed to allow the driver to achieve consis-
tent vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Con-
trol manages engine RPM while launching the vehicle.
This feature is intended for use during race events on a
closed course where consistent 1/4-mile and 0-to-
60 times are desired. The system is not intended to
compensate for lack of driver experience or familiarity
with the race track. Use of this feature in low traction
(cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions may results in excess
wheel slip outside this systems control resulting in an
aborted launch.
Preconditions:
•
Launch Control should not be used on public roads.
Always check track conditions and the surrounding
area.
•
Launch Control is not available within the first
500 miles (805 km) of engine break-in.
•
Launch Control should only be used when the
engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
•
Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved
road surfaces only.
Launch Control is only available when the following pro-
cedure is followed:
1. Press the Race Options tab on the touchscreen to
set RPM, or push the LAUNCH button on the console
to activate Launch Control.
2. Adjust your launch RPMs for optimum launch/
traction, if required.
3. Press the Activate Launch Control button on the
touchscreen, follow instructions in the instrument
cluster display.
○
Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
○
Put vehicle in first gear or Drive.
○
Steering wheel must be centered with tires
pointing forward.
○
Vehicle must be on level ground.
○
Apply brake pressure.
○
While holding the brake, rapidly apply and hold
the accelerator pedal to wide open throttle. The
engine speed will hold at the RPM that was set
in the Launch Control screen.
NOTE:
Messages will appear in the instrument cluster display
to inform the driver if one or more of the above condi-
tions have not been met.
4. When the above conditions have been met, the
instrument cluster display will read “Release Brake”.
5. Keep the vehicle pointed straight and release the
brake.
Launch Control will be active until the vehicle reaches
62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the Electronic Sta-
bility Control (ESC) system will return to its current ESC
mode.
Launch Control will abort before launch completion and
will display “Launch Aborted” in the cluster under any
the following conditions:
•
The accelerator pedal is released during launch.
•
The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer
moving in a straight line.
•
The ESC Off button is pressed to change the system
to another mode.
NOTE:
The Launch Control RPM setting can only be adjusted
while Launch Control is not active. After Launch Control
has been aborted, ESC will return to its current ESC
mode.
Activate Launch Control
MULTIMEDIA 189
5
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels are
spinning and do not have traction. Damage to the
transmission may occur.
To adjust the Launch RPM, drag the slider bar or press
the arrows on the touchscreen to adjust the holding
RPM. The launch RPM limit is between the minimum
and maximum RPM values shown on the gauge, in
100 RPM increments.
SHIFT LIGHT
Your vehicle is equipped with a Shift Light feature that
illuminates the back light of the tachometer in red
within the instrument cluster display. This feature is a
visual cue to manually up-shift using the paddle shifters
or shifting the transmission gear selector.
To actuate the Shift Light feature, press the Shift Light
button on the touchscreen while in the Race Options
tab, then press the Shift Light On button on the touch-
screen. Activation is shown on the instrument cluster
display.
Once the Shift Light is on, it is only active while the gear
shifter is in the Manual or Sport shifter position (M or S
position).
NOTE:
Paddle Shifters can be used to shift, however using the
Paddle Shifters while the shifter is in Drive (D) position
will not enable the Shift Light feature.
The Shift Light RPM Set-Up allows you to set the Shift
Light to illuminate for gears 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5-6. Pressing
and releasing the Up/Down arrow buttons above and
below each listed gear, the RPM values will change in
increments of 250 RPM. Pressing and holding the
arrows will change the RPM values in increments of
500 RPM, ranging from 6250 RPM. The Shift Light
Setup screen may only be accessed if the feature is
enabled, press the Reset to Factory Default button on
the touchscreen to change back to factory settings, or
press the Deactivate Shift Light button on the touch-
screen to turn the system off completely.
GUIDELINES FOR TRACK USE
•
If your SRT vehicle is equipped with Drive Modes
they will alter the vehicle’s performance in various
driving situations. It is recommended that your
vehicle operates in SPORT or TRACK Modes during
the track event.
•
Prior to each track event, verify all fluids are at the
correct levels.
Launch RPM Set-Up
Shift Light Button Shift Light RPM Set-Up
190 MULTIMEDIA
•
Prior to each track event, verify the front and rear
brake pads have more than half pad thickness
remaining. If the brake pads require changing, com-
plete a brake burnish procedure prior to track outing
at full pace.
NOTE:
Use of DOT 4 brake fluid is suggested for extended
track use due to increased thermal capacity.
•
At the conclusion of each track event, it is recom-
mended that a brake bleed procedure is performed
to maintain the pedal feel and stopping capability of
your Brembo High Performance brake system.
•
It is recommended that each track outing should
end with a minimum of one cooldown lap using
minimal braking.
•
All SRT vehicles are track tested for 24 hours of
endurance, however, it is recommended that sus-
pension system, brake system, prop shaft, and half
shaft boots should be checked for wear or damage
after every track event.
•
Track usage results in increased operating tempera-
tures of the engine, transmission, driveline, and
brake system. This may affect Noise Vibration
Harshness (NVH) countermeasures of your vehicle.
New components may need to be installed to return
the system to the original NVH performance.
•
Tire pressure:
○ Recommended tire pressure of 33 psi (230 kPa)
when tires are cold, or below 42 psi (290 kPa)
when hot.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you target below 42 psi
(290 kPa) when tires are hot at the conclusion of
each track session. Starting at 33 psi (230 kPa)
cold and adjusting based on ambient and track con-
ditions is recommended. Tire pressure can be moni-
tored via the instrument cluster display and can
assist with adjustments.
Track burnishing your brakes
To avoid “green lining fade” during track use, the brake
pads and rotors must have a thermal burnish for
factory-installed components or when new brake fric-
tion components are installed:
1. Use one track session to burnish brakes by driving
at 75% speed. Brake at approximately 0.60-0.80g
max without Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
intervention.
2. Complete one lap in this manner until you start
smelling the brakes. Continue for another half lap at
speed, then complete a two-lap cooldown with mini-
mal brake applications. Ensure the brakes are not
smoking. If they are, complete another cooldown
lap.
3. Getting the brakes to smoke is an indication that the
brakes have overheated and may negatively affect
future track usage.
4. Allow vehicle to sit and cool in the paddock for at
least 30 minutes. If an infrared thermal gun is avail-
able, allow rotors to cool to 200°F (93.3°C) before
returning to the track.
5. There should be a thin layer of ash when inspecting
the brake pads. Having the ash layer go more than
half the thickness of the pad material is a sign of an
overly aggressive burnish.
6. Occasionally, a second burnish session is required.
If the brake pads begin to emit an odor during the
next track session, reduce vehicle speed and brak-
ing deceleration rate to burnish targets and follow
steps 2-4.
7. New pads installed on old rotors still need to be bur-
nished. New rotors installed with old pads should be
burnished at the track or street driven for 300 city
miles to develop an adequate lining transfer layer on
the rotor surface prior to track use.
8. Rotors that pulsate during track use should be
replaced.
NOTE:
Resurfacing of the rotors is not recommended, as it
removes mass from the rotor, reducing its thermal
capacity. Resurfacing also thins the rotor cheek,
making it less robust and increasing the likelihood
of pulsation in further track use.
ECO MODE
Press the ECO button on the touchscreen to activate
ECO Mode. ECO Mode modifies the vehicle’s engine
and transmission settings to provide improved fuel
economy with a trade-off in acceleration performance.
Increased engine exhaust noise and/or vibration may
be noticed while ECO is active. This is normal and a
result of the increased amount of operating conditions
where the vehicle is allowed to operate in four-cylinder
mode (6.4L only).
The Paddle Shifters will be disabled while in ECO Mode.
•
ECO is only available in AUTO Mode.
•
Changing the Drive Mode will deactivate ECO.
MULTIMEDIA 191
5
•
ECO will be disabled when another Drive Mode is
selected or the ECO button is pushed.
•
When ECO is activated in AUTO mode, it will remain
in ECO upon activation of AUTO Mode from any other
mode including across key cycles. To deactivate,
press the ECO button again.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance
from your radio. This condition may be lessened or
eliminated by repositioning the mobile phone within the
vehicle. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If
your radio performance does not satisfactorily improve
from repositioning the mobile phone, it is recom-
mended that the volume be turned down or off during
mobile phone operation when not using the Uconnect
system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
INFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure
limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in
such a manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or
further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recom-
mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scien-
tific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard air-
planes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encour-
aged to ask for authorization before turning on the wire-
less radio
page 310.
192 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The sys-
tem automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances
vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal charac-
teristics when the ABS activates:
•
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may con-
tinue to hear for a short time after the stop).
•
Brake pedal pulsations.
•
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop.
The ABS is designed to function with the Original Equip-
ment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may result
in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
•
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output radio
transmitting equipment. This interference can
cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability.
Installation of such equipment should be per-
formed by qualified professionals.
•
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
•
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the available traction.
•
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the igni-
tion is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is
on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits
of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
REAR SEAT REMINDER ALERT
(RSRA)
RSRA alerts you through a visual and auditory notifica-
tion of the possible presence of an object, passenger,
or pet in the rear seats if a rear door was opened up to
10 minutes before the ignition was placed in the
ON/RUN position. RSRA does not directly detect
objects, passengers, or pets in the rear seats. When the
previous conditions are met, RSRA displays the mes-
sage “Check Rear Seat” on the instrument cluster dis-
play and sounds an auditory alert upon the driver plac-
ing the ignition in the OFF position to exit the vehicle.
To enable or disable RSRA, see
page 135.
193
6
WARNING!
•
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a com-
plete stop, then shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and apply the parking brake.
•
Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in
the OFF position, key fob is removed from the
vehicle and vehicle is locked.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL
(EBC) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic
Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System
(TCS). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic Steer-
ing Torque (DST), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Ready
Alert Braking (RAB), and Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake application and
then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can
help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply con-
tinuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence
(do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the
brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan-
ing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the
safety of others.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is
not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the ESC and Electric Power Steering
(EPS) modules that, when equipped, provides torque at
the steering wheel for certain driving conditions in
which the ESC module is detecting vehicle instability.
The torque that the steering wheel receives is only
meant to help the driver realize optimal steering behav-
ior in order to reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only
notification the driver receives that the feature is active
is the torque applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize
the correct course of action through small torques on
the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
the DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s sen-
sitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is
very important to realize that this feature will not steer
the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for
steering the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque
between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent over-
slip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front
axle.
194 SAFETY
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitor-
ing the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of
the vehicle. When Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
determines that the rate of change of the steering
wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to poten-
tially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the
chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce
the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or eva-
sive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due
to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot pre-
vent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that
involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
gerous manner which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to coun-
teract these conditions. Engine power may also be
reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
•
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to
the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteract-
ing the oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the Trac-
tion Control System (TCS) is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
•
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap-
propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
•
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
(Continued)
WARNING!
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to
the steering system, suspension, braking system,
tire type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and
unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-
mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in
this mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used
for specific reasons as noted in the following
paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify Traction Control System (TCS)
and ESC thresholds for activation, which allows for
more wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
turn off.
SAFETY 195
6
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the push
and release of the button may toggle the ESC modes.
Multiple attempts may be required to return to "ESC On"
mode.
WARNING!
•
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, except for the limited slip feature described
in the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is
reduced.
•
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned off. To
enter the “ESC Full Off” mode, push and hold the ESC
OFF button for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped
with the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will
sound, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate, and
the “ESC OFF” message will display in the instrument
cluster. To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the
ESC OFF button.
NOTE:
The system may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial
Off” mode when the vehicle exceeds a predetermined
speed. When the vehicle speed slows below the prede-
termined speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
“Full Off” can only be achieved in Track Mode
(if equipped).
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes
(if equipped).
WARNING!
•
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are significantly
reduced or disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is unavailable.
In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC sys-
tem will not engage to assist in maintaining stabil-
ity. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway
or off-road use only.
•
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode. It should go out with the engine run-
ning. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
comes on continuously with the engine running, a mal-
function has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC sys-
tem becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator
and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt
your speed and driving to the prevailing road condi-
tions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates that
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in a
reduced mode.
NOTE:
•
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition placed in the ON position.
•
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON position,
the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off
previously.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete
stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake
while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
196 SAFETY
the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does
not apply the throttle before this time expires, the sys-
tem will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA
to activate:
•
The feature must be enabled.
•
The vehicle must be stopped.
•
The parking brake must be off.
•
The driver door must be closed.
•
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
•
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direc-
tion (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear;
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
•
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmis-
sion is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped
with a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed,
HSA will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to maintain
(Continued)
WARNING!
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting see
page 135.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
•
If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deacti-
vated with the brake switch. If so, there may not be
enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle
and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is
released. In order to avoid rolling down an incline
while resuming acceleration, manually activate the
trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure
prior to releasing the brake pedal.
•
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the park-
ing brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be
certain to place the transmission in PARK.
•
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a col-
lision or serious personal injury.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet condi-
tions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake
pressure to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers
are in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is
active, there is no notification to the driver and no
driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates
when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the
driver. The Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) will pre-
pare the brake system for a panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS
may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake
Limited Differential (BLD) functions similarly to a limited
slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a
driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of
the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine power
to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may
remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in reduced
modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. Note that TSC can-
SAFETY 197
6
not stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution
when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue
weight recommendations
page 121.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC sys-
tem is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to prevent trailer sway.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED
BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the rear
fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the
blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear and enters standby mode when the
vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
in width, on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The
zone length starts at the side of the vehicle, near the
B-pillar, and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond
the rear fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approxi-
mately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
•
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
•
BSM may experience dropouts (blinking on and off)
of the side mirror warning indicator lights when a
motorcycle or any small object remains at the side
of the vehicle for extended periods of time (more
than a couple of seconds).
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice, mud,
or other road contaminants accumulate on the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located.
The system may also detect blockage if the vehicle is
operated in areas with extremely low radar returns such
as a desert or parallel to a large elevation drop. If block-
age is detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable,
Wipe Rear Corners” message will display in the cluster,
both mirror lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP
alerts will not occur. This is normal operation. The sys-
tem will automatically recover and resume function
when the condition clears. To minimize system block-
age, do not block the area of the rear fascia/bumper
where the radar sensors are located with foreign
objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.) and keep
it clear of road contaminants.
Rear Detection Zones
Sensor Location (Left Side Shown)
198 SAFETY
If the system detects degraded performance due to
contamination or foreign objects, a message will warn
you of a blocked sensor and the warning indicators in
side view mirrors will be on. The warning indicators will
remain illuminated until blockage clearing conditions
are met. First clear any debris from the rear fascia
which may cause a blockage. After removing the block-
age, the following procedure can be used to reset the
system:
Cycle the ignition from ON to OFF and then back ON.
If the blockage message is still present after cycling the
ignition and driving in traffic, check again for a
blockage.
The system may also detect a blockage if the vehicle is
operated in areas with extremely low radar returns such
as a desert or parallel to a large elevation drop.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
located in the outside mirrors, in addition to sounding
an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume
page 200.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (Side, Rear, Front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system
will issue an alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with a
relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 15 mph (24 km/h)) the warning light will be
illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two
vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
BSM Warning Light
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
SAFETY 199
6
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foli-
age, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may
alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adja-
cent lanes
page 310.
For information on how Blind Spot Monitoring functions
when pulling a trailer
page 201.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of
the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is
exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of
the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected,
alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side
of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
5 mph (8 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R), the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the sen-
sors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path (RCP) detection is not a backup aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver
detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation.
Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when
using RCP. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of operation
that are available in the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM sys-
tem will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
Overtaking/Passing
Opposing Traffic
RCP Detection Zones
200 SAFETY
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If
the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the
same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on)
will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal
status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
Trailer Merge Assist — If Equipped
Trailer Merge Assist is a function of the Blind Spot Moni-
toring (BSM) system that extends the blind spot zone to
work while pulling a trailer.
NOTE:
When Trailer Merge Assist is activated, Rear Cross Path
is disabled.
Trailer Merge Assist consists of three sub functions:
•
Automatic Trailer Detection
•
Trailer Length Detection
•
Trailer Merge Warning
Automatic Trailer Detection
There are two modes of operation for the detection of
the trailer length:
•
Automatic Mode — When “Auto Mode” is selected,
the system will use the blind spot sensors to auto-
matically determine the presence and length of a
trailer. The presence of a trailer will be detected
using the blind spot radar within 90 seconds of for-
ward movement of the vehicle. The vehicle must be
moving above 6 mph (10 km/h) to activate the fea-
ture. Once the trailer has been detected, the system
will default to the maximum blind spot zone until the
length has been verified. You will see “Auto” in the
instrument panel cluster
.
•
Maximum Mode — When “Max Mode” is selected,
the system will default to the maximum blind spot
zone regardless of what size trailer is attached
.
NOTE:
Selected setting is stored when the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. To change this setting, it must be
selected through the Uconnect Settings
page 135.
Trailer Length Detection
Once the trailer presence has been established, the
trailer length will be established (by making a
90 degree turn) and then the trailer length category
(example 10-20 ft (3 m to 6 m)) will be displayed. This
can take up to 30 seconds after completing the turn.
NOTE:
During the same ignition cycle, if the vehicle is at a
standstill for a minimum of 90 seconds, a new “trailer
detection request” is enabled by the system once the
vehicle resumes motion.
The maximum trailer length supported by the Trailer
Merge Assist feature is 39.5 ft (12 m). Trailer length is
considered the forward most portion of the trailer hitch
to the rearward most portion of the body, fascia/
bumper, or ramp of the trailer.
Blind Spot Zones With Trailer Merge Assist
1 — Vehicle
2 — Trailer
SAFETY 201
6
The maximum width supported by the Trailer Merge
Assist feature is 8.5 ft (2.59 m). Trailer width is mea-
sured at the widest portion of the trailer and may
include wheels, tires, fenders, or rails.
NOTE:
The ability to detect a trailer may be degraded in
crowded or busy environments. Busy parking lots, nar-
row areas surrounded with trees, or any other crowded
area may prevent the radar sensors from being able to
adequately detect the trailer. The system will try to
detect a trailer at every ignition cycle or 90 seconds of
standstill.
Trailer length will be identified and placed into one of
the following categories:
•
Trailer length up to 10 ft (3 m) — Blind spot zone will
be adjusted to 10 ft (3 m)
.
•
Trailer length between 10 ft to 20 ft (3 m to 6 m) —
Blind spot zone will be adjusted to 20 ft (6 m)
.
•
Trailer length between 20 ft to 30 ft (6 m to 9 m) —
Blind spot zone will be adjusted to 30 ft (9 m)
.
•
Trailer length between 30 ft and 39.5 ft (9 m to
12 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted to Max
distance
.
NOTE:
Trailer length is determined within +/- 3 ft (1 m) of
actual length. Trailers that are the same size as the
category limit, 10/20/30 ft (3/6/9 m), could be subject
to being placed in the category above or below the cor-
rect one.
Trailer Merge Warning
Trailer Merge Warning is the extension of the blind spot
function to cover the length of the trailer, plus a safety
margin, to warn the driver when there is a vehicle in the
adjacent lane. The driver is alerted by the illumination
of the BSM Warning Light located in the outside mirror
on the side the other vehicle is detected on. In addition,
an audible (chime) alert will be heard and radio volume
will be reduced
page 135.
NOTE:
•
The Trailer Merge Alert system DOES NOT alert the
driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
•
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experi-
ence drop outs (blinking on and off) of the side mir-
ror warning indicator lights when a motorcycle or any
small object remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple of
seconds).
•
Crowded areas such as parking lots, neighborhoods,
etc. may lead to an increased amount of false
alerts. This is normal operation.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING
(FCW) WITH MITIGATION
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster
display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver
when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warn-
ings and limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the
potential collision.
Trailer Length Detection
1 — Trailer Length
2—TrailerHitch
3—TrailerWidth
202 SAFETY
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC)
to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When
the system determines that a forward collision is prob-
able, the driver will be provided with audible and visual
warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If the
driver does not take action based upon these progres-
sive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and miti-
gate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts
to the warnings by braking and the system determines
that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking
but has not applied sufficient brake force, the system
will compensate and provide additional brake force as
required.
If an FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below
38 mph (62 km/h), the system may provide the maxi-
mum or partial braking to mitigate the potential forward
collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitiga-
tion event stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds and then
release the brakes.
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
•
The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
•
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other
than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts
based on the course prediction. This is expected
and is a part of normal FCW activation and
functionality.
•
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking
events within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking
portion of FCW will be deactivated until the next igni-
tion cycle.
•
The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to
the surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low, the
FCW system will be automatically deactivated
page 310.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the respon-
sibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning
could lead to serious injury or death.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are pro-
grammable through the Uconnect system
page 135.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting
and the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible colli-
sion with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warn-
ings and it applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings when the
latter is at a farther distance than the “Medium” set-
ting. This provides the most reaction time to avoid a
possible collision.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting allows
the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front when the distance between the
vehicle in the front is much closer. This setting provides
less reaction time than the “Far” and “Medium” set-
tings, which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
FCW Message
SAFETY 203
6
NOTE:
•
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” pre-
vents the system from providing limited active brak-
ing, or additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision, but maintains the audible and visual
warnings.
•
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the sys-
tem from providing autonomous braking, or addi-
tional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision.
•
The system will retain the last setting selected by
the driver after ignition shut down.
•
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in
the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are
far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with
the same or higher rate of speed.
•
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condi-
tion that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle
is still drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the condition
that limited the system performance is no longer pres-
ent, the system will return to its full performance state.
If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster dis-
plays:
•
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
•
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal condi-
tions, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with run flat tires, when the
TPMS indicates a tire pressure of 14 psi (96 kPa) or
lower, always check tire pressure and replace the tire at
the first opportunity. At inflation pressure of or below 14
psi (96 kPa) the tire is in the Run Flat mode of opera-
tion. In this condition, it is recommended that a vehicle
keep a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) for a
maximum distance of 50 miles (80 km). The manufac-
turer does not recommend using the run flat feature
while driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or towing
a trailer.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pres-
sure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven — this is normal
and there should be no adjustment for this increased
pressure.
See
page 284 on how to properly inflate the vehi-
cle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recom-
mended cold tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must
be increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in
order for the TPMS Warning Light to be turned off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi
(165 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough
to turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle
204 SAFETY
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still
be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn
off only after the tires have been inflated to the vehi-
cle’s recommended cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS sensor is
not designed for use on aftermarket wheels and
may contribute to a poor overall system perfor-
mance or sensor damage. Customers are encour-
aged to use Original Equipment Manufacturer
(OEM) wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature
operation.
•
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
TPMS sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that
you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership
to have your sensor function checked.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will pre-
vent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a
tire failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
Light.
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres-
sure in the tire.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim-
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure
levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the
receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to regularly check the
tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the
proper pressure
page 310.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module
•
Four TPMS sensors
•
Various TPMS messages, which display in the instru-
ment cluster, and a graphic displaying tire pressures
•
TPMS Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated, when one or more of the four
active road tire pressures are low. In addi-
tion, the instrument cluster will display an "Inflate to XX"
message and a graphic display of the pressure value(s)
with the low tire(s) in a different color
page 72.
NOTE:
Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,
BAR or kPa.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
SAFETY 205
6
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is in a different color on
the graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended cold
tire pressure displayed in the “Inflate to XX” message.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update, the graphic dis-
play of the pressure value(s) will return to its original
color and the TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once
the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
The TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is
detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. The
instrument cluster display will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “--“
in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring System sensor(s) is not being
received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer
flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will not be
present, and a pressure value will be displayed instead
of dashes. A system fault can occur by any of the
following:
•
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
•
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
•
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
•
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
NOTE:
There is no TPMS sensor in the spare tire. The TPMS
will not be able to monitor the tire pressure. If you
install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a
pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon
the next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS Warning Light
will remain on, a chime will sound, and the instrument
cluster display will still display a pressure value in the
different color graphic display and an “Inflate to XX”
message will be displayed. After driving the vehicle for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster
display will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message
for five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of
the pressure value. For each subsequent ignition switch
cycle, a chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the instrument cluster display will display a
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five seconds and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
TPMS will update automatically.
In addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off and the
graphic in the instrument cluster display will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (--), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
206 SAFETY
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as
when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on
your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on. The instrument cluster will display
the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display
pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will
no longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
FEATURES
•
Seat Belt Systems
•
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
•
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly must be secured in the appropri-
ate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in
a rear seating position
page 222.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use
the proper child restraint
page 222.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs,
the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, see
page 307 for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
SAFETY 207
6
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor
driver and could cause a collision that includes you.
This can happen far away from home or on your own
street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibil-
ity of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking
the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle
should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will sig-
nal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front
seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front pas-
senger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when
an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passen-
ger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder
Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the
BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts
are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to
buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is
traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin
until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoc-
cupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or
other items are placed on the outboard front passenger
seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat
(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or out-
board front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the
driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some col-
lisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
•
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
208 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
•
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into
one another in a collision, hurting one another
badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt
for more than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle,
take it to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
•
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
•
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
•
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so
that your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
•
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a colli-
sion and leave you with no protection. Inspect the
seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the seat belt system. If your vehicle is
(Continued)
WARNING!
involved in a collision, or if you have questions
regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take
your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating
Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the
front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
SAFETY 209
6
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immedi-
ately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded web-
bing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the
top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer
twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the
top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or
downward to position the seat belt away from your
neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release
the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position
that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will pre-
fer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and
if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoul-
der belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the
upward position without pushing or squeezing the
release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is
latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
210 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
•
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is com-
fortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
•
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
•
Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable
upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its
lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you
with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender
should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for
a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
•
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the rec-
ommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove
slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the
seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a
collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner
or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further
reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The
seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint sys-
tem
page 229.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
SAFETY 211
6
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click”.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Auto-
matic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indi-
cates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking
Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emer-
gency) locking mode.
WARNING!
•
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
(Continued)
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger) Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
60/40 Second Row (5 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
212 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
•
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or chil-
dren who are using booster seats. The locked
mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with the electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
•
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
•
Supplemental Side Air Bags
•
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
Seat Track Position Sensors
•
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in
the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the
air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight sec-
onds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air
Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes
on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a mal-
function is detected that could affect the air bag sys-
tem. The diagnostics also record the nature of the mal-
function. While the air bag system is designed to be
maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four
to eight-second interval.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Control-
ler (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air
bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemen-
tal Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the
instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a
single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has
SAFETY 213
6
been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immedi-
ately
page 78.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts
for both the driver and front passenger. The front air
bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint sys-
tems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center
of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove com-
partment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your
arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument
panel.
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system pro-
vides output appropriate to the severity and type of col-
lision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Control-
ler (ORC), which may receive information from the front
impact sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during
an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low
energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher
energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (OCS) that is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
•
Do not put anything on or around the air bag cov-
ers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some col-
lisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
214 SAFETY
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional pro-
tection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear,
side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not
deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for example,
some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location
of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves
are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag
should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a
collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the infla-
tor units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated
to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper pas-
senger side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size.
The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes
to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly
deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a
Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is
designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as
determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of
the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
•
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is
located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The
OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM
communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC
may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant
classification. In order for the OCS to operate as
designed, it is important for the front passenger to be
seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the infla-
tion rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the
OCS estimates that:
•
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
•
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-
senger, including a child; or
•
The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-
facing child restraint; or
•
The front passenger is not properly seated or his or
her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of
time.
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
SAFETY 215
6
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint sys-
tem, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front
passenger seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
•
Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most prob-
able classification. The OCS estimates the seated
weight on the front passenger seat and where that
weight is located. The OCS communicates the classifi-
cation status to the ORC. The ORC uses the classifica-
tion to determine whether the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is impor-
tant for the front passenger to be seated properly and
properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passen-
gers are:
•
Sitting upright
•
Facing forward
•
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet com-
fortably on or near the floor
•
Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is work-
ing improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter-
mines the most probable classification of the occupant
that it detects. The OCS will detect the front passen-
ger’s decreased or increased seated weight, which may
result in an adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not
mean that the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front pas-
senger seat may result in a reduced-power deployment
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front pas-
senger seat may result in a full-power deployment of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
•
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or
instrument panel).
•
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
•
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
•
The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
•
Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
•
Objects are lodged between the front passenger
seat and center console.
•
Accessories that may change the seated weight on
the front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
•
Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most prob-
able classification. If an occupant in the front passen-
ger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide
an output signal to the OCS that is different from the
occupant’s properly seated weight input, for example:
Seated Properly
216 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp-
erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input. This may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing for-
ward, in the center of the seat, with your feet com-
fortably on or near the floor.
•
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger
seat. Holding an object may provide an output sig-
nal to the OCS that is different than the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
•
Placing an object on the floor under the front pas-
senger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on
the floor under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light
in the instrument panel
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed. Do not
make any modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat,
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
SAFETY 217
6
trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US
LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
•
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
•
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the spe-
cific model being repaired. Always use the correct
seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
•
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
•
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
•
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem (SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part
except those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
•
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, seat cover or cushion may inadvertently
change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal
collision. This could result in death or serious
injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is
involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not
comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
•
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
•
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal
impact by working together with the seat belts, preten-
sioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a
label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the
seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating
SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at
a very high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
218 SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other inju-
ries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in cer-
tain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Chil-
dren are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploy-
ing air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or com-
plete ejection of vehicle occupants through side win-
dows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
•
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the deploy-
ment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the
side windows where the SABIC and its deployment
path are located should remain free from any
obstructions.
•
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into
the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain
side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air
Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based
on the severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occu-
pant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some
side collisions that do not impact the area of the pas-
senger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front
air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than
it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
•
Occupants, including children, who are up against
or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children,
should never lean on or sleep against the door,
side windows, or area where the side air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
restraint.
•
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that
is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
•
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the cen-
ter of the seat.
(Continued)
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SAFETY 219
6
WARNING!
•
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
•
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you prop-
erly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy
at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you
have Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed
to activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether deploy-
ment in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based
on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags and seat belt pretensioners should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the
vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing
system will deploy the side air bags and seat belt pre-
tensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or com-
plete ejection of vehicle occupants through side win-
dows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
•
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
•
Supplemental Side Air Bags
•
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
Seat Track Position Sensors
•
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,
any or all of the following may occur:
•
The air bag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the
air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are simi-
lar to friction rope burns or those you might get slid-
ing along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are not per-
manent and normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if
you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-
like particles. The particles are a normal by-product
of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used
for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have
skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these par-
ticles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immedi-
ately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
•
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
•
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
220 SAFETY
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication net-
work remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
•
Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(if equipped).
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power.
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response
System.
•
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of
these other functions in response to the Enhanced Acci-
dent Response System:
•
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
•
Cut off battery power to the:
○ Engine
○ Electric Motor (if equipped)
○ Electric power steering
○ Brake booster
○ Electric park brake
○ Automatic transmission gear selector
○ Horn
○ Front wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to place the ignition in the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) position to avoid draining the battery.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine com-
partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or dam-
age to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights)
after an accident, reset the system by following the pro-
cedure described below. If you have any doubt, contact
an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem functions after an event, the ignition switch must
be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the
system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after per-
forming the reset procedure, the vehicle must be towed
to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to pro-
tect you. Do not modify the components or wiring,
including adding any kind of badges or stickers to
the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper pas-
(Continued)
WARNING!
senger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify
the front fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in
any way (including removal or loosening/tightening
of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabili-
ties, contact an authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in cer-
tain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
•
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
SAFETY 221
6
•
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during
a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buck-
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter how
strong you are. The child and others could be badly
injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for chil-
dren from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
•
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who have
not reached the height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have out-
grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
222 SAFETY
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can
be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direc-
tion than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-
facing by children who have outgrown their infant car-
rier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-
positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit
properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident,
it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear
seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
SAFETY 223
6
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all
the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touch-
ing the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then
the child still needs to use a booster seat in this
vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check
seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt
buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can
move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt con-
tacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the cen-
ter of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the
seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder
belt will not protect a child properly, which may result
in serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) XX
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
224 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback and one top tether anchorage located
behind the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions
may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchor-
ages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Label
60/40 Second Row LATCH Positions (5 Passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seat-
ing Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
60/40 Second Row LATCH Positions (7 Passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seat-
ing Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Captain’s Chairs Second Row LATCH Positions
(6 Passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seat-
ing Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY 225
6
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to
attach the child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5
kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight is more than
65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchor-
age system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages
if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using
the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard
seating positions?
No—5Passenger
N/A—6Passenger
No—7Passenger
7 and 5 Passenger: Use the seat belt and tether anchor
to install a child seat in the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position next to a child seat using
the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows con-
tact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
226 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that
are found at the rear of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback. They are just
visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the gap between the seatback
and seat cushion.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Five Passenger Vehicles: 2nd Row Upper Tether
Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the
back of the seat. To access them, pull the
carpeted floor panel away from the seat
back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Six And Seven Passenger Vehicles: 2nd Row Upper
Tether Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear
seating position located on the back of the seat.
Five Passenger Rear Seat Lower Anchorages
Six Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages
Seven Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether
Strap Anchorage (Five Passenger)
Five Passenger Top Tether Strap Mounting
Six Passenger Top Tether Strap Mounting (Captain's
Chair)
SAFETY 227
6
Six And Seven Passenger Vehicles: 3rd Row Upper
Tether Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear
seating position located on the back of the seat. To
access them, pull the carpeted floor panel away from
the seat back, this will expose the top tether strap
anchorages.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to
the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connec-
tion to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints
and some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have
a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage
and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the
anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH — Five Or Seven
Passenger Vehicles Second Row Seating
Only
WARNING!
•
Do not install a child restraint in the center posi-
tion using the LATCH system. This position is not
approved for installing child seats using the LATCH
attachments. You must use the seat belt and
tether anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
•
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. For typical installa-
tion instructions, see
page 229.
Vehicle With A Center Arm Rest Tether —
Five Or Seven Passenger Seating Only
For rear-facing child restraints secured in the center
seat position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center
seat position has an armrest tether that secures the
arm rest in the upward position.
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower
the arm rest. The tether is located behind the arm-
rest and hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
Seven Passenger Top Tether Strap Mounting (2nd Row
Bench)
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether
Strap (3rd Row Bench)
Tether Anchorages (3rd Row Bench)
228 SAFETY
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic
seat backing.
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the
strap located on the front of the arm rest.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See
page 211
to check what type of seat belt each seating position
has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise
the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in
the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See
page 231 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they
play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor.
Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH sys-
tem, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and
out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt inter-
feres with the child restraint installation, instead of
buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it.
Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they
should not play with them.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they
to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
SAFETY 229
6
WARNING!
•
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
•
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the
seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the web-
bing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor
page 211.
Please see the table below and the following sections
for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For
Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
60/40 Second Row (5 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger) Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
230 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat
belt to attach a forward-facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward-facing child restraint, up to the recom-
mended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
•
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating posi-
tion. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if
adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the web-
bing to retract back into the retractor. As the web-
bing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking
mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, con-
nect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten
the tether strap. For directions to attach a tether
anchor, see
page 231.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See
(Continued)
SAFETY 231
6
WARNING!
page 225 for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchor-
age. You may need to move the seat forward to pro-
vide better access to the tether anchorage. If there
is no top tether anchorage for that seating position,
move the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind
the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away
from the seat back, this will expose the top tether
strap anchorages.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path for the strap between the anchor and the child
seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear
head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where
possible, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the two posts. If not possible,
lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the tether
strap over the seatback and headrest then attach
the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of
the seat.
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether
Strap Anchorage (Five Passenger)
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether
Strap Anchorage (6 and 7 Passenger Seating)
Third Row Top Tether Strap Anchorage (6 and 7 Passenger
Seating)
Bench Seat Top Tether Strap Mounting
(5 Passenger Seating)
232 SAFETY
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
•
The top tether anchorages are not visible until the
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind
the seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
•
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your
pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possi-
bly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking
or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped)
in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts.
Second Row Bench Seat Top Tether Strap Mounting
(7 Passenger Seating)
Third Row Seating Top Tether Strap Mounting
Captain’s Chair Top Tether Strap Mounting
SAFETY 233
6
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-
not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collec-
tion & Privacy” in your Uconnect Radio Instruction
Manual or “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cyber-
security”
page 86.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the pos-
sible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
MAKE INSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first placed in the
ON/RUN mode. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon
as possible. After the bulb check, this light will illumi-
nate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag
System has been detected. It will stay on until the fault
is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately
page 207.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should be
able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See
an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inop-
erable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the opera-
tion of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use
a floor mat that is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair
safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control.
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
•
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a
regular basis.
•
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing
any other floor mat. NEVER install or
stack an additional floor mat on top of
an existing floor mat.
•
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved
floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of
your vehicle.
•
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any
pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the
floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
•
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
(Continued)
234 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a
loss of vehicle control.
•
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interfer-
ence with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
•
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the
floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure
to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
•
It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always
check your floor mat has been properly installed
and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat
fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU
SHOULD MAKE OUTSIDE THE
VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other
objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the
tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the lug nut/bolt torque for
tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper
cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights
and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check
turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instru-
ment panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
WARNING!
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH when using
“Track-Use” parts and equipment:
•
NEVER use any “Track-Use” equipment on public
roads. FCA US LLC does not authorize the use of
“Track-Use” equipment on public roads.
•
The intended use of “Track-Use” parts is for race
vehicles on race tracks. To help ensure the safety
of the race driver, engineers should supervise the
installation of “Track-Use” parts.
•
FCA US LLC does not authorize the installation or
use of any part noted as “Track-Use” on any new
vehicle prior to its first retail sale.
WARNING!
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
•
ALWAYS remove any “Track-Use” equipment before
driving on public roads.
•
ALWAYS properly use your three-point seat belts
when driving on public roads.
•
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle.
EXHAUST GAS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
•
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in con-
fined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
•
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
•
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
SAFETY 235
6
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the
vehicle is damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect
the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compart-
ment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions provided to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal con-
ditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
236 SAFETY
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on the
switch bank just below the climate controls.
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flash-
ers. When the button is activated, all directional turn
signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of
an emergency. Push the button a second time to turn
off the Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when
your vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard
warning for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance,
the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate
even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may
discharge the battery.
SOS AND ASSIST MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an SOS and
ASSIST button.
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber
page 310.
•
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data), 4G
(data) network, which comes as a built-in function.
Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your
Brand Connect service is active and you are con-
nected to an operable LTE (voice/data), 4G (data)
network.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there
will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call sys-
tem initiates a call to an SOS operator. To cancel the
SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button on
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
SOS And ASSIST Mirror
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
237
7
the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button
on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS Call
will turn off the green LED light on the Rearview
Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once
a connection to an SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to an
SOS operator:
○
Indication that the occupant placed an SOS Call
○
The vehicle brand
○
The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional assistance is needed.
NOTE:
Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS
operator may be able to open a voice connection
with the vehicle to determine if additional assis-
tance is needed. Once the SOS operator opens a
voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call system,
the operator should be able to speak with you or
other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will
attempt to remain connected with the SOS operator
until the SOS operator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropri-
ate emergency responders and provide them with
important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
•
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe
location.
•
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could pre-
vent operable network and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and GPS sig-
nal reception is required for the SOS Call system to
function properly.
•
The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehi-
cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR
AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
•
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may
not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
•
The Rearview Mirror light located between the
ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously illuminate
red.
•
The Device Screen will display the following mes-
sage “Vehicle device requires service. Please con-
tact an authorized dealer.”
•
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an autho-
rized dealer.”
WARNING!
•
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
•
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi-
nated, have an authorized dealer service the Occu-
pant Restraint Control system immediately.
238 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
•
The ignition is in the OFF position
•
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
•
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
•
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash
•
LTE (voice/data), 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or
obstructed
•
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
•
Operator error by the SOS operator
•
LTE (voice/data), 4G (data) network congestion
•
Weather
•
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
NOTE:
•
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data), 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
could prevent LTE (voice/data), 4G (data) and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
from placing an emergency call. An operable LTE
(voice/data), 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call system to
function properly.
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that
your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your pro-
vided radio supplement for complete information.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
•
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need
a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you will be
connected to a representative for assistance. Road-
side Assistance will know what vehicle you’re driving
and its location. Additional fees may apply for road-
side assistance.
•
Brand Connect Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Brand Connect.
•
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
•
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for Radio,
Phone and NAV issues.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING —
IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
•
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
Scan me
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 239
7
WARNING!
•
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid
ice or slippery areas.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if chang-
ing the driver’s front tire, block the passenger’s rear
tire.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being raised or lifted.
RUN FLAT TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
SRT models are equipped with “run flat” tires. Run flat
tires allow the vehicle to be driven approximately
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h). Tire service
should be obtained to avoid prolonged run flat feature
usage
page 291.
WARNING!
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) if the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light is illuminated. Vehicle han-
dling and braking may be reduced. You could have a
collision and be severely or fatally injured.
JACK LOCATION — IF EQUIPPED
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are
located in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
Lift up on the load floor handle to access the jack and
tools in the cargo area.
To remove, press down firmly on the upper tabs of the
jack storage cover to release.
Wheel Blocked
Load Floor Handle
Jack And Tools Storage Cover
240 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rotate the plastic thumb screw on the end of the jack
to loosen the jack and remove from the bracket.
SPARE TIRE STOWAGE —
IF EQUIPPED
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle/lug wrench connected
to the square socket extension to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under a plastic cover at
the center-rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the
liftgate opening.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or
power tool may damage the winch.
SPARE TIRE REMOVAL —
IF EQUIPPED
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
vehicle. The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear
cargo area on the outside of the vehicle.
For spare tire removal, see the following steps:
1. Remove the jack tools from the bag.
2. Raise the rubber mat and remove the plug from
storage compartment floor.
3. Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use
the lug wrench handle and extension to completely
lower the spare tire. Keep turning the handle coun-
terclockwise until the winch stops.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or
power tool may damage the winch.
Thumb Screw Location
Jack Removal
Spare Tire Location
Winch Plug Location
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 241
7
4. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and rotate it
vertically behind the rear fascia/bumper.
NOTE:
The vehicle may come equipped with a metal
retainer only when removing the spare
page 293.
5. Pull the metal stamping toward you.
6. Slide the metal stamping up the steel extension
tube and winch cable. Rotate the metal stamping
and push it through the hole of the wheel.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS —
IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
•
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the trans-
mission in PARK.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
(Continued)
Winch Location
Wrench Rotation
Spare Tire
Spare Tire Retainer
Sleeve And Cable
242 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely care-
ful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on loca-
tions other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is
still on the ground.
2. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations
are critical. See the following images for proper jack-
ing locations.
3. For the front tire, place the jack on the body flange
just behind the front tire. Do not raise the vehicle
until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
4. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire. Do not
raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.
Jack Warning Label
Jack And Tool Assembly
Jacking Locations
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 243
7
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clock-
wise. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the
flat tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Install the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and
install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter-
clockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an authorized
dealer or at a service station
page 301.
10. Push out the small center cap using the jack tool
from inside the aluminum road wheel and position
the wheel behind the rear fascia/bumper.
11. Push the end of the winch’s cable, spring and steel
sleeve through the back of the road wheel. Making
sure the valve stem is facing the ground when the
wheel is stowed.
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
Mounting Spare Tire
244 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
12. Slide the road wheel on the ground until it is
directly under the winch and between the rear
fascia/bumper and exhaust system heat shields.
Raise the tire by turning the lug wrench on the
winch extension clockwise until it clicks/ratchets
three times to make sure the cable is tight.
NOTE:
Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the
underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch
cable may result if the vehicle is driven with the tire
loose.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or
power tool may damage the winch.
13. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are
properly seated against the wheel.
14. Lower the jack to the fully closed position. Return
the tools to the proper positions in the tool bag.
Fold the flap on the tool bag under the tools and
roll the tools in the bag underneath the others. Use
the hook and loop fasteners to secure the tool bag
to the jack with the lug wrench on the forward side
of the jack. Expand the jack on the bracket by turn-
ing the thumb screw clockwise until it is tight to
prevent rattles.
15. Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of the cargo
area. Roll up and store the Jack, Tool Kit and Tire
Changing Instructions. Reinstall the cover for the
jack in the rear storage bin.
16. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired
as soon as possible and properly secure the spare
tire, jack and tool kit.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire
in the places provided.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improp-
erly, so please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Installing Winch
Wrench Rotation
Road Wheel Installed In Spare Location
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 245
7
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located under the passen-
ger's front seat. There are remote terminals located
under the hood to assist in jump starting.
NOTE:
Be sure that the disconnected cable ends do not touch
each other, or either vehicle, before properly connected
for jump starting.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic trans-
mission into PARK (P) and turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote posi-
tive (+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to
remove it.
4. Remove the protective cover over the remote nega-
tive (-) battery post.
5. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach,
apply the parking brake and make sure the ignition
is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving
fan blades.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadver-
tent electrical contact. You could be seriously
injured.
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle
while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
UnderHood Jump Starting Location
Remote Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective Cap)
Remote Negative (-) Post (Covered With Protective Cap)
246 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post (exposed
metallic/unpainted post of the discharge vehicle)
located on the right hand side next to the under-
hood fuse box.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode and could
result in personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 RPM since it provides no charging benefit,
wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle engine.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the disconnecting
procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the discharged
vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of
the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective covers over the remote posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) posts of the discharged
vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
have the battery and charging system tested at an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY –
IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for a
capless fuel system. The fuel funnel can be found in the
rear cargo area with the jack and tools. If refueling is
necessary, while using an approved gas can, insert the
refueling funnel into the filler neck opening. Take care
to open both flapper doors with the funnel to avoid
spills.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light to turn on.
•
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel
door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 247
7
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel
is provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the rear cargo storage area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the
fuel nozzle.
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors
open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating can be:
•
Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
•
Strong smell of coolant
•
White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
•
Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do
not open the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
If the temperature gauge is moving towards or close to
the HOT (H) position, take the following actions to
reduce the potential for overheating.
•
On highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmis-
sion in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine
idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the
brakes.
•
Turn off the Air Conditioning (A/C). The A/C system
adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning
the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•
Turn the temperature control to maximum heat and
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids
in removing heat from the engine cooling system.
Refueling Funnel
Refueling Funnel Location
Inserting Funnel
248 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the park-
ing brake before activating the Manual Park Release.
In addition, you should be seated in the driver’s seat
with your foot firmly on the brake pedal when activat-
ing the Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is
not secured by the parking brake, or by proper con-
nection to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park
Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to seri-
ous injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the trans-
mission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a
depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Open the center console and locate the Manual
Park Release cover, remove it by snapping the cover
away from the console hinges.
NOTE:
Depending on your vehicle’s trim level, the Manual
Park Release cable may be located in a different
area on the center console.
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the metal
latch in towards the tether strap.
5. While the metal latch is in the open position, pull
upward on the tether strap until the lever clicks and
latches in the released position. The transmission is
now out of PARK (P) and the vehicle can be moved.
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release is
activated may damage the Manual Park Release
mechanism, the transmission, and/or the armrest.
NOTE:
To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally, firmly
apply the parking brake.
To Disengage The Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release, apply ten-
sion upward while pushing the release latch towards
the tether to unlock the lever.
Manual Park Release Cover
Release Latch
Released Position
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 249
7
2. Once the tension has been released and the lever
has been unlocked, be sure it is stowed properly
and locks into position.
NOTE:
Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back in
place.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around
the front wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the
gear selector. Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE
(D) and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the
accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake
pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure
that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning
the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic Stabil-
ity Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” mode, before
rocking the vehicle
page 195. Once the vehicle has
been freed, push the ESC OFF button again to restore
ESC On mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage,
or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for lon-
ger than 30 seconds continuously without stopping
when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
•
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-
longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
•
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
Release Latch
Stowed Position
250 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described under
page 130.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Rear-Wheel Drive Models All-Wheel Drive Models
With Single-Speed Trans-
fer Case
All-Wheel Drive Models With Two-Speed Transfer
Case
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Detailed Instructions
page 130
•
Transmission in PARK
•
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
•
Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK BEST METHOD
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains
is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/
bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws
regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters,
etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, instructions on
shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK (P) in
order to move the vehicle can be found on
page 249.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
•
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
REAR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis-
sion is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
wheels off the ground) under the following conditions:
•
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N). For
instructions on shifting the transmission to NEU-
TRAL (N) when the engine is off
page 249.
•
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
•
The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles
(48 km).
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 251
7
CAUTION!
•
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther
than 30 miles (48 km) with rear wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear
wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable
steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the
straight position) with the rear wheels raised and the
front wheels ON the ground.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels OFF
the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, vehicles with a two-speed transfer
case may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL
wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEU-
TRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK
page 130.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case
have no NEUTRAL (N) position, and therefore must be
towed will all four wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
•
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
•
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously
mentioned requirements can cause severe trans-
mission and/or transfer case damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
TOWING A DISABLED SRT VEHICLE
FCA requires towing your vehicle with all four wheels
OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's battery is
discharged, instructions on shifting the transmission
out of PARK (P) for loading onto a flatbed truck
page 249.
CAUTION!
•
Towing this vehicle using any other method can
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage.
•
Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes
effect in the event of an impact
page 221.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data
that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s sys-
tems performed under certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle
page 221.
252 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot
or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as pos-
sible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first.
The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally
only a concern for fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
•
Check engine oil level
•
Check windshield washer fluid level
•
Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear
or damage
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder and fill as needed
•
Check function of all interior and exterior lights
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plans for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
•
Change oil and filter.
•
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
•
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
•
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
•
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
•
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
•
Inspect exhaust system.
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace engine air cleaner filter, if necessary.
253
8
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes
First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
OrYears:234567 8 9101112131415
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X XXXXX X XXXXXXX
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and
replace if necessary.
XXXXXXX
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if
using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-
road or frequent trailer towing.
XX X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake
function.
XXXXXXX
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs.
** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
XX
Replace accessory drive belt. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
254 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes
First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
OrYears:234567 8 9101112131415
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect accessory drive belt tensioner and pul-
ley, replace if necessary.
X
Change transfer case fluid - Normal Usage. X
Change transfer case fluid - Severe Usage
(police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing).
XX
Replace PCV valve. X
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and affect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
SCHEDULED SERVICING — SRT
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages speci-
fied to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the
best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent
maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe
operating conditions, such as dusty areas and very
short trip driving. Inspection and service should also be
done anytime a malfunction is suspected.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
The instrument cluster display will display an “Oil
Change Required” message and a single chime will
sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle ser-
viced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor
the time since the last oil change. Change your vehi-
cle's oil if it has been six months since your last oil
change, even if the oil change indicator message is
NOT illuminated.
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months,
whichever comes first.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 255
8
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If
a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than an authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under instrument clus-
ter display
page 72.
At Each Stop For Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once A Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the termi-
nals as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
engine oil, brake master cylinder, and add as
needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
•
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
•
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns
on.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
MAINTENANCE PLAN — SRT
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign
of irregular wear, even if it occurs
before scheduled maintenance.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
If using your vehicle for any of the fol-
lowing: dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
256 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the exhaust system. XXXXXXXXXXXX
Adjust the parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
XXXXX
Drain the transfer case and refill. XXXXX
Inspect the accessory drive belts
replace if necessary.
XX
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
and boot seals, for cracks or leaks and
all parts for damage, wear, improper
looseness or end play; replace if
necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. XXXXX
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if
necessary.
X
Change front and rear axle fluid. XXXXX
Change transfer case fluid. X X
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 257
8
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Replace the spark plugs – 6.2L Super-
charged Engine.
**
XX
Replace the spark plugs –
6.4L Engine.
**
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
120 months if not done at
150,000 miles (240,000 km).
XX
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, monthly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
258 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter
5 — Engine Oil Fill
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 259
8
5.7L ENGINE
1 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
2 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 10 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter
260 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
6.2L SUPERCHARGED ENGINE
1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 11 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter
6 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
8
6.4L ENGINE
1 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
2 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 10 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter
262 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time
to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after
a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
•
Crosshatched zone.
•
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
•
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end
of the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
•
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is at the low
end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The instrument cluster display will indicate when the
washer fluid level is low. When the sensor detects a low
fluid level, the Low Washer Fluid Warning Light will illu-
minate and the "Washer Fluid Low" message will
display.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check
the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade perfor-
mance. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that
meets or exceeds the temperature range of your cli-
mate. This rating information can be found on most
washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free bat-
tery. Water will never have to be added, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immedi-
ately with large amounts of water.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 263
8
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts
and connections however, the pressures generated
by these machines is such that complete protection
against water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
may void your warranty and could result in civil penal-
ties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection — Non-SRT
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
page 305.
NOTE:
Hemi engines at times can tick right after startup and
then quiet down after approximately 30 seconds. This is
normal and will not harm the engine. This characteristic
can be caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the
vehicle is started then shut off after driving a short dis-
tance. Upon restarting, you may experience a ticking
sound. Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused
for an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended
oil changes or extended idling. If the engine continues
to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes
on, see the nearest authorized dealer.
Engine Oil Selection — SRT
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
page 306.
NOTE:
Hemi engines at times can tick right after startup and
then quiet down after approximately 30 seconds. This is
normal and will not harm the engine. This characteristic
can be caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the
vehicle is started then shut off after driving a short dis-
tance. Upon restarting, you may experience a ticking
sound. Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused
for an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended
oil changes or extended idling. If the engine continues
to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes
on, see the nearest authorized dealer.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by
the API. The manufacturer only recommends API trade-
mark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies
0W-40 and 5W-40 engine oil.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
bers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection
dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered prod-
uct and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives.
264 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil
and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to
the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for
replacement. The quality of replacement filter varies
considerably. We recommend using a MOPAR® engine
oil filter. If a MOPAR® engine oil filter is unavailable,
only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Fil-
ter performance requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals page 253.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is neces-
sary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before starting
(Continued)
WARNING!
the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies considerably.
Only high quality Mopar® certified filters should be
used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release the spring clips from the engine air cleaner
filter cover.
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the
engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the hous-
ing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or
debris is present before replacing the engine air
cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter inspec-
tion surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto the
housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the engine air
cleaner filter cover to the housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Spring Clips
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
8
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — SRT
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the fasteners on the engine air cleaner
cover filter.
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the
engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the hous-
ing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or
debris is present before replacing the engine air
cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter inspec-
tion surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto the
housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Tighten the fasteners on the engine air cleaner filter
assembly.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter cover
lid screws or damage may result.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This service
should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a
performance test. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, for further warranty
information.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a — If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by an authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 — Fasteners
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
266 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance
with a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed
by an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
For the proper maintenance intervals page 253.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove compartment. Perform the following proce-
dure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
2. There are glove compartment travel stops on both
sides of the glove compartment door. Partially close
the glove compartment door and push inward to
release the glove compartment travel stop on one
side and repeat this procedure for the opposite side.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment
door toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage the
glove compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE:
When disengaging the glove compartment door
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose, remove the
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compart-
ment door and lifting the clip out of glove compart-
ment door.
5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the retaining
tab and mid way snap that secures the filter cover to
the HVAC housing. Disengage the mid way snap by
pulling the door outward. Unhinge the filter cover on
the right side to fully remove the cover.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 267
8
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out
of the housing.
7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indi-
cate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the door
hinge and reattach the tension tether by inserting
the tether clip in the glove compartment and sliding
the clip away from the face of the glove compart-
ment door.
9. Push the door to the near closed position to reen-
gage the glove compartment travel stops.
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT
INSPECTION
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks
that run across the ribbed surface of the belt from rib to
rib, are considered normal. This is not a reason to
replace belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not
across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running
along a rib must be replaced. Also have the belt
replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe
glazing.
Conditions that would require replacement:
•
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from
belt body)
•
Rib or belt wear
•
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
•
Belt slips
•
Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct posi-
tion on pulley)
•
Belt broken (identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
•
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools. We recommend having your vehicle ser-
viced at an authorized dealer.
Cabin Air Filter Cover
1 — Retaining Tab
2 — Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
268 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically. Use a lithium-based grease,
such as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and wear.
Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts con-
cerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and
a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always
use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt
or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline,
etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. If chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots are present, clean the
wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the
following points:
•
Wear or uneven edges
•
Foreign material
•
Hardening or cracking
•
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass
may be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
flip up the release tab on the wiper blade and while
holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper
blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
1—Wiper
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 269
8
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from
the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade toward the right side of the vehicle to sepa-
rate the wiper blade from the wiper arm).
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wiper s
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper
arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of
the wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and
the blade side of the wiper facing up and away from
the windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush
against the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release
tab and snap it into its locked position. Latch
engagement will be accompanied by an audible
click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
270 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
grasp the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to
wiper arm with your right hand. With your left hand
hold the wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away
from the wiper arm past its stop far enough to
unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the recep-
tacle on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade,
move the wiper blade upward and away from the
wiper arm to disengage.
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of
the wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper
blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into
place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust sys-
tem; or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil changes.
Replace as required.
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain Car-
bon Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odor-
less. Breathing it can make you unconscious and
can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO
see
page 233.
•
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
(Continued)
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 271
8
WARNING!
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your
vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
•
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy
the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions
control device and may seriously reduce engine
performance and cause serious damage to the
engine.
•
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Con-
tinued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is
important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Ser-
vice, including a tune-up to the manufacturer's specifi-
cations, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
•
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission
is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing
the vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as during diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
•
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised.
The fan starts automatically and may start at any
time, whether the engine is running or not.
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to
the OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled
and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON
mode.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming
to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front
of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from
a garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connec-
tion at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect
the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM
IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 253.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information page 305.
272 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant is
different and should not be mixed with Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT
engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
tors or antirust products, as they may not be com-
patible with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with pro-
pylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of propyl-
ene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
•
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any cool-
ant is needed to be added to the system please con-
tact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important to use the same engine coolant (OAT cool-
ant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material
Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant:
•
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water.
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated.
Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
•
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the
vehicle is operated.
•
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any cool-
ant is needed to be added to the system, please
contact an authorized dealer.
•
Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended
and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT
and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
an authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing
surfaces.
WARNING!
•
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald-
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 273
8
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground, clean up any ground spills
immediately. If ingested, seek emergency assistance
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the
“MAX” and “MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows
no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may
be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
•
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant additions are required,
the cooling system should be pressure tested for
leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a mini-
mum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle over-
flow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs
may result in unsatisfactory engine cooling perfor-
mance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 253.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high
(Continued)
WARNING!
brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and pos-
sible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master
Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
Brake System Warning Light is on. If necessary, add
fluid to bring level within the designated marks on the
side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be
sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid
level should be checked when pads are replaced. If the
brake fluid is abnormally low, check the system for
leaks. For further information
page 305.
WARNING!
•
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid
page 305. Using the wrong type of brake
fluid can severely damage your brake system
and/or impair its performance. The proper type of
brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in an open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
(Continued)
274 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
•
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake fail-
ure. This could result in a collision.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore
the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer
can check your transmission fluid level using special
service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life.
Use only the manufacturer's specified transmission
fluid
page 305. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmis-
sion; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder
page 305.
FRONT/REAR AXLE FLUID
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than
1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than
1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 275
8
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
page 305.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly
should be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect
the fluid level.
Adding Fluid
With the vehicle in a level position, fill the transfer case
to bottom edge of fill plug opening.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recom-
mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is
15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
page 305.
FUSES
General Information
WARNING!
•
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating
as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with
another fuse of higher amp rating. The use of a
fuse with a rating other than indicated may result
in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any
other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit
breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper
fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
•
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the igni-
tion is off and that all the other services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
•
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
•
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result
in vehicle battery discharge.
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery jump start posts. This
center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays,
and circuit breakers. A description of each fuse and
component may be stamped on the inside cover, other-
wise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the
inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element
(blown fuse)
276 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it
is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
Power Distribution Center Location
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 277
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 – – Spare
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan *
F04 60 Amp Yellow – ESP Pump Non-SRT
F05 40 Amp Green – Air Suspension Comp *
F06 40 Amp Green – ABS Pump SRT
F07 30 Amp Pink – Starter Solenoid
F08 – – Spare
F09 30 Amp Pink – Diesel Fuel Htr*/VACPUMP*
F10 40 Amp Green – CBC #2 / EXT Light
F11 30 Amp Pink – Trlr Tow Brake *
F12 40 Amp Green – CBC #3 / Pwr Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – HVAC BLWR MTR
F14 40 Amp Green – CBC #4 / Ext Light
F15 40 Amp Green – LTR Engine Cooling *
F16 – – Spare
F17 30 Amp Pink – HDLP Washers *
F18 – – Spare
F19 20 Amp Blue – Solenoid Headrest *
F20 30 Amp Pink – Pass Door Mod
F21 – – Spare
F22 20 Amp Blue – ECM * / PCM *
F23 30 Amp Pink – CBC #1 / Int Light
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Mod
F25 30 Amp Pink – Ft Wiper
278 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F26 30 Amp Pink – ESP / ECU Valves
F27 – – Spare
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trlr Tow B/U *
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trlr Tow Park *
F30 30 Amp Pink – Trlr Tow Pwr *
F31 – – Spare
F32 30 Amp Pink – DTCM
F33 – – Spare
F34 30 Amp Pink – ELSD *
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof *
F36 30 Amp Pink – EBL
F37 25 Amp Clear – HVAC RR Blower MTR *
F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter
F39 30 Amp Pink – PLG
F40 – 10 Amp Red DRL / HEADLAMP LVL *
F41 – – Spare
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F43 – – Spare
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F45 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Security MOD
F46 – – Spare
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – 10AmpRed ICS/HVAC
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Mod * / ELSD *
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 279
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F51 – 15 Amp Blue KIN / RF HUB / ESCL *
F52 – – Spare
F53 – 20AmpYellow TrlrTowLTTurn/Stop*
F54 – – Spare
F55 – – Spare
F56 – 15 Amp Blue PCM *
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow NOX Snsrs*/PMSnsrs*/FuelHTR*
F58 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamps LT *
F59 – 10 Amp Red SCR Pump Relay *
F60 – 15 Amp Blue TCM
F61 – 10 Amp Red PM Sensor *
F62 – 10 Amp Red A/C Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils */ Ignition Coil Capacitors*
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors / ECM
F65 – – Spare
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof */ LRSM */ RVM / DSRC / USB Port / DTV*/WCP*
F67 – 15 Amp Blue CDM/UCI Port/USB Port
F68 – 20 Amp Yellow RR Wiper Mtr
F69 – 15 Amp Blue Spot Light Feed *
F70 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Mtr
F71 – 30 Amp Green Amplifier */ ANCM *
F72 – 10 Amp Red ECM * / PCM *
F73 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamp RT *
F74 – – Spare
F75 – 10 Amp Red Dual Batt Ctrl *
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F76 – 10 Amp Red ESP
F77 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / ELSD *
F78 – 10 Amp Red ECM / PCM * / EPS
F79 – – Spare
F80 – 10 Amp Red UGDO
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trlr Tow RT Turn / Stop *
F82 – 10 Amp Red SCCM / Cruise Control / DTV *
F83 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door
F84 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster
F85 – 10 Amp Red ORC (Airbag)
F86 – 10 Amp Red ORC (Airbag)
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Suspension Mod *
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster / CSG * / ITBM *
F89 – – Spare
F90 – – Spare
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Pwr Outlet Cargo Area
F92 – 10 Amp Red Rr Console Lamp*/RRPwrOutlet
F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 – 10 Amp Red Sbw / Tcase Sw
F95 – 10 Amp Red Rr Cam / Blind Spot Snsr *
F96 – 10 Amp Red Rr Seat Heater Sw*
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow Rr Htd Sts / Htd Str Wheel *
F98 – 20AmpYellow FrontHtdSts*/VentSts
F99 – 10 Amp Red Hvac / Dash / Hlfm/ Prktronx
F100 – 10 Amp Red Active Damping *
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F101 – 15 Amp Blue In Car Temp Sensor / Humidity Sensor
F102 – 15 Amp Blue Spare
F103 – 10AmpRed PTC/RRHVAC*
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUT-IP / Console / Trnk
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Glove Compartment Lamp 194
Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lamps VT4976
Visor Vanity Lamp V26377
Rear Cargo Lamp 214–2
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) 103
Telltale/Hazard Lamp 74
282 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam/LED Headlamps LED
Front Turn Signal Lamps (Bulb Reflector) 7444NA
Front DRL/Turn/Park Lamp (Premium) LED
Front DRL/Park Lamp (Base) LED
Front Side Marker Lamps LED
Front Fog Lamps LED
Rear Tail Lamps/Side Marker Lamps LED
Rear Stop/Turn Signal Lamps LED
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps LED
Rear Backup Lamps 921 (W16W)
Rear License Lamps LED
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED
Bulb Replacement
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric con-
ditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric condi-
tions change to allow the condensation to change back
into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually acceler-
ate the clearing process.
FRONT TURN SIGNAL
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Rotate the turn signal bulb a quarter turn counter-
clockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil con-
tamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb
comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the bulb
with rubbing alcohol.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
The front fog lamps are LEDs. See an authorized dealer
for service.
REAR TAIL, STOP AND TURN SIGNAL LAMPS
The rear tail, stop, and turn signal lamps are LED. See
an authorized dealer for replacement.
REAR LIFTGATE MOUNTED BACK-UP LAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Back-up lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s)
counterclockwise.
4. Remove/replace bulb(s).
5. Reinstall the socket(s).
6. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283
8
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP
(CHMSL)
The Center High Mounted Stop Lamp is an LED assem-
bly. See an authorized dealer for replacement.
REAR LICENSE LAMP
The rear license lamps are LEDs. See an authorized
dealer for service.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the follow-
ing information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Num-
bers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures,
and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard
have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from
this tire size designation. Example:
215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall pre-
ceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
•
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
•
"R" means radial construction, or
•
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
•
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
•
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
•
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
8
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side,
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
•
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
01 means the year 2001
•
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of psi
(pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum infla-
tion pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driv-
er’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to
the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if
you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold
tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire And Load-
ing Information Placard
page 120.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing
page 120.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
8
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity calculated in Step
4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
•
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-
tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
8
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
•
Safety
•
Fuel Economy
•
Tread Wear
•
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
•
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
•
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
•
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause
the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side
door.
At least once a month:
•
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgment when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated.
•
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary
with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in
mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi
(21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal
pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced
vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle
operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe oper-
ating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires
could cause them to fail. You could have a serious
collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maxi-
mum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
•
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
•
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
•
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size
and service description (Load Index and Speed Sym-
bol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not
designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of infla-
tion pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to
as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when
the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi
(96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat
mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
When a Run Flat tire is changed after being driven in a
Run Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition, please
replace the TPMS sensor as it is not designed to be
reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle
on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
For more information
page 204.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do
not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds con-
tinuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone
near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires should
be replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
tire should be replaced.
Tire Tread
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
8
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying fac-
tors including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across
the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will
reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
•
Distance driven
•
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
manufacturer strongly recommends using tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed
page 291. Refer to
the Tire And Loading Information Placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index and
Speed Symbol of a tire
page 285.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely
affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and
wheels may change suspension dimensions and
performance characteristics, resulting in changes
to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress
to steering and suspension components. You could
(Continued)
WARNING!
lose control and have a collision resulting in seri-
ous injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capac-
ity, other than what was originally equipped on
your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index
could result in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have a collision.
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can
be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation
on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of
four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry con-
ditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on
ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C)
or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more infor-
mation, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation
or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can
be identified by a “mountain/snowflake”
symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size
and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect
the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized
tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
a compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire desig-
nated for temporary emergency use
page 126.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped
Tire And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the
tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this
option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recom-
mended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the let-
ter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a con-
ventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare
tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire
and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293
8
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a con-
ventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare
tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same
as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at
the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use
spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the
same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driv-
er’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equip-
ment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on
your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of
vehicle control.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their
luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the
same soap solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the sur-
faces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt
ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or
sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage
the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and auto-
matic car washes may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of
tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to
prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treat-
ment or Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to
remove the water droplets from the brake components.
This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors
and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
maintain this finish.
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow
traction devices are recommended. Follow these rec-
ommendations to guard against damage.
•
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the snow traction device
manufacturer.
•
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with
the snow traction device.
•
Please follow the table for the recommended tire
size, axle and snow traction device:
RWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum Pro-
jection Beyond Tire Profile Or
Equivalent)
SPECIAL SERVICE
Rear
P265/60R18
THULE XG-12 PRO or Equivalent
SXT
265/60R18
265/50R20
GT
R/T
CITADEL
265/50R20
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295
8
AWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum Pro-
jection Beyond Tire Profile Or
Equivalent)
PURSUIT
Rear
255/60R18
THULE XG-12 PRO or Equivalent
SXT
265/60R18
265/50R20
GT
R/T
CITADEL
265/50R20
SRT 392
SRT Hellcat
295/45ZR20
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredict-
able handling. You could lose control and have a
collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
•
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components,
it is important that only traction devices in good
condition are used. Broken devices can cause seri-
ous damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device before
further use.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
•
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
•
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
•
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation, operat-
ing speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
•
Do not use traction devices on a compact spare
tire.
TIRE ROTATION
RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate
at different loads and perform different steering, han-
dling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they
wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute
to a smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 253.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
NOTE:
The Tire Pressure Monitor System will automatically
locate the pressure values displayed in the correct
vehicle position following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram.
296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must con-
form to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
tive performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart signifi-
cantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and
climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These
grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement, as measured
under controlled conditions on speci-
fied government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat,
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive tem-
perature can lead to sudden tire fail-
ure. The grade C corresponds to a level
of performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
8
109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labora-
tory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Exces-
sive speed, underinflation, or exces-
sive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following steps
to minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
•
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
•
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of ser-
vice (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system
is started again.
BATTERY STORAGE MODE
With the ignition in the ON position, engine not running,
navigate to the battery gauge page on the instrument
cluster display, then press and hold the OK button. The
vehicle will be put into battery storage mode, which will
greatly increase the amount of time the vehicle can sit
and restart without needing to disconnect the battery.
Going into battery storage mode will increase the
amount of time between starts to about 60 days.
NOTE:
The key fob buttons will not work while the vehicle is in
battery storage mode, pulling the door handle will wake
the vehicle and allow it to recognize the key fob to
unlock the door.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
AGENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other sea-
sons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.
Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is
operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other
extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint,
metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corro-
sion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY
MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and there-
fore different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the
lenses.
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a
mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely
with water.
•
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accu-
mulated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen
Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to pro-
tect your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch
the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept
clear and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or simi-
lar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as
possible.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertiliz-
ers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials
are well packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon
as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up
paint to match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical sol-
vents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the
belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do
not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if
you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Pro-
gram facility for inspection.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
•
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away
immediately.
•
Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299
8
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
The leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather uphol-
stery and should be removed promptly with a damp
cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft
cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be taken to
avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid.
Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, sol-
vents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show
any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more
so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and the manufacturer recommends Mopar®
total care leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean
the leather seats as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery,
as damage to the upholstery may result.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive
type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on a label located on the left front cor-
ner of the instrument panel pad, visible from outside of
the vehicle through the windshield.
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys-
tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. How-
ever, there will be some loss of overall braking effective-
ness. You may notice increased pedal travel during appli-
cation, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that
required with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Base Model Vehicle
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 ft-lb
(176 N·m)
M14x1.50 22mm
SRT Model Vehicle
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
110 ft-lb
(149 N·m)
M14x1.50 22mm
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the
socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not
insert it half way).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer
or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to
be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly
tightened.
Windshield VIN Label Location
Wheel Mounting Surface
301
9
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the
engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the
engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see a
dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
recommended octane number can cause engine failure
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience
these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide optimum fuel
economy and performance when using high
quality unleaded regular gasoline having a
posted octane number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of higher octane premium gasoline
is not required, as it will not provide any benefit over
regular gasoline in these engines.
5.7L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded gasoline having an
octane range of 87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of 89 octane plus gasoline is recom-
mended for optimum performance and fuel economy.
6.2L SUPERCHARGED AND 6.4L
ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations, provide optimal fuel
economy and performance when using high-
quality unleaded premium gasoline having a
posted octane number of 91 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane premium
gasoline is required for this engine.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corro-
sion and stability additives are recommended. Using
gasolines that have these additives will help improve
fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to fur-
ther aide in minimizing engine and fuel sys-
tem deposits. When available, the usage of
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials intended
for gum and varnish removal may contain active sol-
vents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel sys-
tem gasket and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
Torque Patterns
302 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Use of these blends may result in starting and driv-
ability problems, damage critical fuel system compo-
nents, cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as
they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains
greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing
methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX
FUEL VEHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gaso-
line with higher ethanol content may void the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
•
Operate in a lean mode.
•
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
•
Poor engine performance.
•
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
•
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
MODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Com-
pressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
system components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
MANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT)
IN GASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that
is blended into some gasolines to increase octane.
Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance
advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system perfor-
mance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-
mends that gasoline without MMT be used in your
vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indi-
cated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask
your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California refor-
mulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
formance and damage the emissions control
system.
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most
of these products contain high concentrations of
methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 303
9
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines 24.6 gal 93 L
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 6 qt 5.6 L
5.7L Engine 7 qt 6.6 L
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine – Without Trailer Tow Package 10.4 qt 9.9 L
3.6L Engine – With Trailer Tow Package 11 qt 10.4 L
5.7L Engine – Without Trailer Tow Package 15.4 qt 14.6 L
5.7L Engine – With Trailer Tow Package 16 qt 15.2 L
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 24.6 gal 93.0 L
Engine Oil With Filter
6.2L Engine 8.3 qt 7.8 L
6.4L Engine 7 qt 6.6 L
Cooling System*
6.2L Engine 14.7 qt 13.9 L
304 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
US Metric
6.2L Engine Intercooler 4.0 qt 3.9 L
6.4L Engine 16 qt 15.5 L
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L & 5.7L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material
Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trademark
page 264.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method , 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF8&9Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the
function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front-Rear) – Without
Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Axle Differential (Rear) – With Electronic
Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with integrated friction modifier.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 305
9
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — SRT
Component Fluid, Lubricant or Genuine Part
Engine/Intercooler Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil
We recommend using Mopar® API Certified SAE 0W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the manufac-
turer Material Standard MS-12633. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-40 engine oil can be used but must have the API Donut trade-
mark
page 264.
Fuel Selection Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher (R+M)/2 method, 0-15% ethanol (Do not use E-85).
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — SRT
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF8&9Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the
function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – Single-Speed We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front) We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Axle Differential (Rear) – With Electronic
Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with integrated friction modifier.
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then
DOT 4 is acceptable.
If using DOT 4 brake fluid, the fluid must be changed every 24 months. This interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not
apply.
306 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's ser-
vice history. This can often provide a clue to the current
problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let
the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle (additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements
when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally inter-
ested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with
our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high qual-
ity service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed cor-
rectly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you
are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or
owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if
you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable
to resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's
Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer center
should include the following information:
•
Owner's name and address
•
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
•
Authorized dealer name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com(USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if you
are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside Assis-
tance services last for five years or 60,000 miles on the
odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated from the
start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as set forth in
your Warranty Information book.
1
1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc.
Medford, MA 02155, except in AK,CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where ser-
vices are provided by Cross Country Motor Club of California, Inc.,
Thousand Oaks, CA 91360.
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of
gas/fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing
as a result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free:
USA: 1-800-521-2779/Canada: 800-363-4869. Provide
your name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) required
for covered services, license plate number, and your
location, including the telephone number from which
you are calling. Briefly describe the nature of the prob-
lem and answer a few simple questions. You will be
given the name of the service provider and an esti-
mated time of arrival. If you feel you are in an unsafe
situation, please let us know. With your consent, we will
contact local police or safety authorities.
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you
may submit your original receipts from the licensed tow-
ing or service facility, for services rendered within
30 days of the occurrence. Be sure to include your VIN,
307
10
odometer mileage at the time of service, and current
mailing address. We will process the claim based on
vehicle and service eligibility. If eligible, we will reim-
burse you for the reasonable amount actually paid,
based on the usual and customary charges for that ser-
vice in the area where they were provided. FCA US LLC’s
determination relating to reimbursement is final. Corre-
spondence should be mailed to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any
time. The Roadside Assistance program is subject to
restrictions and conditions of use, which are deter-
mined solely by FCA US LLC.
Flat Tire Service
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch
a service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare
tire (if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s
Manual. This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home. We
will dispatch a service provider to deliver a small
amount of fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you to a
nearby station. This service is limited to two occur-
rences in a 12-month period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen
locks are keeping you from getting on your way, help is
just a phone call away. This service is limited to provid-
ing access to the vehicle’s seating area. It does not
cover the cost of replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and confi-
dence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a result of a
mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance will dis-
patch a towing service to transport your vehicle to the
closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram
dealer. If you choose to go to another dealer, you will be
responsible for the cost of the extra distance.
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA CANADA CUSTOMER CARE
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, CDMX
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN
ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 423-6343
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
HEARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA
US LLC has installed special Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with FCA
US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service
offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users,
dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to
connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans
are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans autho-
rized, endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If
you purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you
will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification
308 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle deliv-
ery date. If you have any questions about the service
contract, call FCA US LLC’s Service Contract National
Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
For Canadian residents, you may have purchased addi-
tional coverage with an extended service contract. FCA
Canada Inc. stands fully behind its service contracts.
Be sure that the one you buy is a genuine Canada Inc.
service contract. We are not responsible for other com-
panies’ contracts. If you purchased a contract other
than a genuine FCA Canada Inc. service contract and
you have a problem, you will have to contact the admin-
istrator of that contract for resolution. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the FCA's Ser-
vice Contract National Customer Hotline at (800) 465-
2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
Mopar Vehicle Protection Plans offer valuable protec-
tion against repair costs after your vehicle warranties
have expired. Mopar Vehicle Protection plans are the
ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide addi-
tional protection beyond your vehicle's warranty.
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract
you may have purchased from another manufacturer. If
you require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools,
and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted
with the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provi-
sions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for
further information.
In Canada:
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provi-
sions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market. Refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/en/
for further information.
For French, refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/fr/ for
further information.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep
it operating at its best and maintain its original
condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
WASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or
cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US
LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in indi-
vidual problems between you, an
authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Scan me
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 309
10
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department immedi-
ately. Canadian customers who wish to
report a safety defect to the Canadian
government should contact Transport
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investi-
gations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
Ordering and Accessing Additional
Owner’s Information
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a com-
plete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or
components and is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make
it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step trouble-
shooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic
tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order a digital copy of your Service or Diagnostic Pro-
cedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada).
Or visit:
www.techauthority.com to order physical copies of
Owner’s Manuals (US).
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty Infor-
mation Books can be ordered through Archway at:
•
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Change Of Ownership Or Address
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have
changed your address, please provide the following
information and mail to:
FCAUSLLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
•
Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
•
Vehicle Identification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
•
Exact Odometer Reading
•
First and Last Name
•
Phone Number
•
Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
•
Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innova-
tion, Science and Economic Development applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation
est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouil-
lage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
310 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. Es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. Este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 311
10
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes.................301
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) .103, 105
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .........273
AddingFuel....................120
Additives,Fuel ..................302
Adjust
Down......................31
Forward ....................31
Rearward....................31
Up.......................31
Advance Phone Connectivity ............164
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ...............215
Air Bag Warning Light ...........213,215
Driver Knee Air Bag ..............218
Enhanced Accident Response ......221,252
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ..........252
FrontAirBag .................215
If Deployment Occurs .............220
Knee Impact Bolsters .............218
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ........221
Maintenance .................221
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .......213
Side Air Bags .................218
Transporting Pets ...............233
AirBagLight...............79,213,234
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)....265
Air Conditioner Maintenance............266
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ..........266, 267
Air Conditioner System ..............266
Air Conditioning
Rear......................50
Air Conditioning Filter ........53,265, 266, 267
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ...........52
Air Conditioning System...............52
AirFilter......................265
Air Pressure
Tires .....................290
Alarm
Arm The System ................20
Disarm The System ...............20
Rearm The System ...............20
Security Alarm .................81
Alarm System
Security Alarm .................20
All Wheel Drive (AWD)................95
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle .....................9
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........272,304
Disposal ...................273
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...........193
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...............81
Assist, Hill Start ..................196
AudioSettings...................158
Audio Systems (Radio)...............135
AutoDownPowerWindows.............60
Automatic Headlights ................43
Automatic High Beams ...............42
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ........52
Automatic Transmission .............87,92
AddingFluid...............275,306
Fluid And Filter Change ............275
Fluid Change .................275
Fluid Level Check ...............275
FluidType .............275,
305, 306
Special
Additives ...............275
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode......94
AutoPark......................88
Auxiliary Driving Systems .............198
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .......57
Auxiliary Power Outlet ................57
AxleFluid.....................305
Axle Lubrication ..................306
B
Battery ....................79, 263
Charging System Light .............79
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ..........15
Battery Saver Feature................43
Belts, Seat ....................234
BlindSpotMonitoring...............198
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
OrAudioDeviceAfterPairing..........162
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...........269
B-Pillar Location ..................287
Brake Assist System ................194
Brake Control System, Electronic..........194
Brake Fluid ...............274,305, 306
Brake System ................274,301
Anti-Lock (ABS) ................301
Fluid Check ...............274,306
Master Cylinder ................274
Parking.....................90
Warning Light ..................79
Brake/Transmission Interlock ............92
Bulb Replacement ..............282, 283
Bulbs,Light....................235
312
C
Camera, Rear ...................119
Capacities, Fluid .................304
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ...............259, 264
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..........273
Carbon Monoxide Warning ..........235, 236
Cargo Area Cover ..................64
Cargo Compartment ................64
Light......................64
Luggage Carrier .................65
Cargo Light .....................64
Cargo Tie-Downs ..................65
Car Washes ....................299
CD........................158
Cellular Phone ..................192
Center High Mounted Stop Light ..........284
Certification Label.................120
Chains, Tire ....................295
Chart, Tire Sizing .................285
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . . .86
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety..........233
Checks, Safety ..................233
Child Restraint ..................222
Child Restraints
Booster Seats .................223
Child Seat Installation .............231
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .....229
Infant And Child Restraints ...........223
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ........227
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ....225
Older Children And Child Restraints ......223
Seating Positions ...............224
Child Safety Locks .................23
Clean Air Gasoline.................302
Cleaning
Wheels ....................294
Climate Control ...................47
Automatic ...................47
Cold Weather Operation...............89
Compact Spare Tire ................293
Connected Services ........166,167,168,176
Contract, Service .................308
Controls......................154
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ........273
Cooling System ..................272
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........273
Coolant Level .................274
Cooling Capacity ...............304
Disposal Of Used Coolant ...........273
Drain, Flush, And Refill .............272
Inspection ................
272,274
PointsToRemember..............274
Pressure Cap .................273
Radiator Cap .................273
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) ..........272,304, 305, 306
Corrosion Protection................298
Cruise Control (Speed Control)......103,104,105
Cruise Light ..................84,85
Customer Assistance ...............307
Cybersecurity ...................135
D
Daytime Running Lights ...............42
Defroster, Windshield ...............234
De-Icer, Remote Start ................19
Deleting A Phone .................162
Diagnostic System, Onboard ............85
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ..................263
Disabled Vehicle Towing ..............251
DiscDrive.....................158
Disconnecting...................162
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........273
Disturb ......................164
Door Ajar ....................79, 80
Door Ajar Light .................79, 80
Door Locks ...................20, 23
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors ....23
Doors .......................20
Driver Memory Presets ..............158
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ...............26
Driving......................133
E
Economy (Fuel) Mode ................92
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .......57
Electric Brake Control System ...........194
Anti-Lock Brake System ............193
Electronic Roll Mitigation .........195,197
Electric Remote Mirrors ...............37
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case .......95, 96
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......104
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........195
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light.......80
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ...........247
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ..........250
Hazard Warning Flasher ............237
Jacking ....................239
Jump Starting .................245
Emission Control System Maintenance .......86
Engine....................259, 262
Air Cleaner ..................265
Break-In Recommendations .........89, 90
Checking Oil Level ...............263
Compartment.........259, 260, 261, 262
INDEX 313
11
Compartment Identification .....259, 260, 261
Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............306
Cooling....................272
Exhaust Gas Caution ...........235, 236
Fails To Start ..................89
Flooded, Starting ................89
Fuel Requirements ............302, 304
Jump Starting .................245
Oil.................264,304, 306
Oil Filler Cap ...............259, 264
OilFilter....................265
Oil Selection ............264,304, 305
Oil Synthetic .................264
Starting ....................87
Engine Oil Life Reset
..............73
Engine Oil Viscosity ................264
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . .221, 252
Ethanol ......................302
Exhaust Gas Cautions ............235, 236
Exhaust System ...............235, 271
Exterior Lights ..............41,235, 282
F
FamilyAlerts ...................176
FAQ........................176
Features .....................168
Filters
Air Cleaner ..................265
Air Conditioning .........53, 265, 266, 267
Engine Oil ................265, 306
Engine Oil Disposal ..............265
Flashers .....................237
Hazard Warning ................237
Turn Signals .............84,235, 283
Flash-To-Pass....................42
Flooded Engine Starting ..............89
Fluid, Brake ....................306
Fluid Capacities ..................304
Fluid Leaks ....................235
Fluid Level Checks
Brake .....................274
Engine Oil ...................263
Fluids And Lubricants ...............305
Fog Lights.....................283
Fog Lights, Service ................283
Fold-Flat Seats ...................26
Folding Rear Seats .................28
Forward Collision Warning .............202
Four-Way Hazard Flasher .............237
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ..............250
Front Axle (Differential) ..............275
Fuel .......................302
Additives ...................302
CleanAir ...................302
Economy Mode .................92
Ethanol ....................302
Gasoline ...................302
Materials Added ................302
Methanol ...................302
Octane Rating ..............302, 306
Requirements ..............302, 304
Specifications ..............305, 306
Tank Capacity .................304
Fueling......................120
Fuses .......................276
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ..........38
Gasoline, Clean Air ................302
Gasoline, (Fuel) ..................302
Gasoline, Reformulated ..............302
Gear Ranges ....................93
Getting Started ..................167
Glass Cleaning ..................300
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............122
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ............121
GVWR.......................120
H
Hazard Warning Flashers .............237
Headlights
Automatic ...................43
Cleaning ...................298
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ......42
Lights On Reminder ...............43
OnWithWipers.................43
Passing ....................42
Head Restraints ..................33
Heated Mirrors ...................38
Heated Seats ....................32
Heated Steering Wheel ...............25
Hill Start Assist ..................196
Hitches
TrailerTowing.................123
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ..........38
Hood Prop .....................62
Hood Release ...................62
I
Ignition.......................17
Key Fob Battery Low Or Dead ..........17
KeyFobNotDetected..............17
Keyless Ignition .................17
Keyless Push Button ..............17
Push Button Ignition ..............17
Switch .....................17
Illuminated Entry ..................45
314 INDEX
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ..............16
InsideRearviewMirror.............36,237
Instrument Cluster ...........69,70,71,72
Display...................72,74
MenuItems ..................75
Instrument Cluster Display
Audio......................77
Driver Assist ..................76
Messages ...................77
Screen Setup ..................77
Speedometer ..................75
Speed Warning .................77
TrailerTow ...................76
Trip.......................76
VehicleInfo...................75
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ..........300
Integrated Trailer Brake Control ..........127
Interior And Instrument Lights ............44
Interior Appearance Care .............299
Interior Lights ...................44
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) .........45
Introduction ....................166
Inverter
Power .....................58
iPod/USB/MP3 Control...............55
J
Jacking And Tire Changing ..........239
Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions .......240
Jacking Instructions ................242
Jack Location ...................240
Jack Operation ..................242
Jump Starting ...................245
K
KeyFob ......................14
Arm The System ................20
Disarm The System ...............20
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........16
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .15
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ....16
Keyless Enter 'n Go™
Passive Entry ..................21
Passive Entry Programming ...........21
Keys........................14
Replacement ..................16
Sentry (Immobilizer) ..............16
L
Lane Change Assist.................43
LaneSense ....................117
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................208
Latches ......................235
Hood ......................62
Lead Free Gasoline ................302
Leaks, Fluid ....................235
LifeOfTires....................292
Liftgate.......................63
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ...........46
LightBulbs....................235
Lights.......................235
AirBag................79,213,234
Automatic Headlights ..............43
AWD......................83
Brake Assist Warning .............196
Brake Warning .................79
Bulb Replacement ............282, 283
Cargo .....................64
Center Mounted Stop .............284
Cruise .................82,84,85
Daytime Running ................42
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ............41
ECOMode ...................84
Electric Power Steering .............80
Electronic Stability Control ............81
Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Indicator ....80
Exterior..................41,235
Fog......................283
Forward Collision Warning ..........82,83
Hazard Warning Flasher ............237
Headlights On With Wipers ...........43
High Beam ...................85
High Beam/Low Beam Select ..........42
Hood Open ...................80
Interior.....................44
LaneSense ...............81,84,85
Lights On Reminder ...............43
LowFuel....................82
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ......82
NEUTRAL ....................83
Oil Temperature ................80
Park ....................43,84
Passing ....................42
Reading ....................44
RearServicing.................283
RearTailLamps................283
Seat Belt Reminder ...............79
Security Alarm .................81
Service .................282, 283
ServiceAWD..................82
SideMarker..................283
SnowMode...................84
Speed .....................85
Sport Mode ...................84
Stop Start .................82,84
TowMode ...................84
Track Mode ...................84
Traction Control ................196
INDEX 315
11
Trailer Brake Disconnected ...........80
Transmission Temperature ...........81
Turn Signals ...........41,84,235, 283
ValetMode...................85
VanityMirror ..................36
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions ....80
Loading Vehicle ..................120
Tires .....................287
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ...........77
Load Shed Battery Saver On.............77
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ........77
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ........77
Locks
Child Protection .................23
Manual .....................20
Power Door ...................21
Lubrication, Body .................269
Luggage Carrier ..................65
Lug Nuts/Bolts ..................301
M
Maintenance ....................62
Maintenance Free Battery .............263
Maintenance Schedule ............253, 255
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . .82, 86
Manage My Account ................176
Manual
Service ....................310
MediaMode ...................158
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ..........25
Memory Seat ....................25
Memory Seats And Radio ..............25
Methanol .....................302
Mirrors.......................36
Electric Remote .................37
ExteriorFolding.................37
Heated .....................38
Outside .....................37
Rearview .................36,237
Vanity .....................36
MobileApp....................167
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle .....................9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...........204
Mopar Parts ...................309
Multi-Function Control Lever.............41
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period.............89
O
Occupant Restraints................207
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ........302, 306
Oil Change Indicator ................73
Reset .....................73
Oil, Engine ..................264,306
Capacity ...................304
Checking ...................263
Dipstick ....................263
Disposal ...................265
Filter ..................265, 306
Filter Disposal .................265
Identification Logo ...............264
Materials Added To ..............264
Pressure Warning Light .............80
Recommendation ............264,304
Synthetic ...................264
Viscosity .................264,304
Oil Filter, Change .................265
Oil Filter, Selection ................265
Oil Pressure Light..................80
Onboard Diagnostic System .............85
Operating Precautions ...............85
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ................310
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..............37
P
Paint Care ....................298
Parking Brake ...................90
ParkSense System, Rear..............111
Passive Entry ....................21
Performance ....................75
Pets .......................233
Phone Mode ...................159
Pinch Protection ..................62
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......287
Power
Brakes ....................301
Distribution Center (Fuses) ...........276
Door Locks ...................21
Inverter.....................58
Liftgate .....................63
Mirrors.....................37
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ........57
Seats ......................31
Steering .................102,305
Sunroof ....................61
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ........24
Windows....................60
Power Seats
Down......................31
Forward ....................31
Rearward....................31
Up.......................31
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ..........211
Preparation For Jacking ..............240
316 INDEX
Presets ......................158
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ...................211
R
Radial Ply Tires ..................291
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ........273
Radio
Presets ....................158
Radio Controls ..................154
Radio Mode ....................154
Radio Operation ...............154,192
Radio Remote Controls ..............154
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ............46
Rear Air Conditioning ................50
Rear Axle (Differential)...............275
RearCamera...................119
RearCrossPath..................200
Rear ParkSense System ..............111
Rear Seat Reminder Alert .............193
Rear Seats, Folding .................28
Rear Wiper/Washer.................46
Reclining Front Seats ................27
Recreational Towing ................130
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....131
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) ....132
Reformulated Gasoline ..............302
Refrigerant .................266, 267
Release, Hood ...................62
Reminder, Seat Belt ................208
Remote Control
Starting System .................18
Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock .....171,176
Remote Features, Horn And Lights .........172
Remote Features, Starting ..........171,178
Remote Keyless Entry ................14
ArmTheAlarm .................20
Disarm The Alarm ................20
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........16
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control .......154
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .............18
Remote Starting System ..............18
Replacement Bulbs ................282
Replacement Keys .................16
Replacement Tires ................292
Reporting Safety Defects .............309
Restraints, Child..................222
Restraints, Head ..................33
Retractable Cargo Area Cover ............64
Roadside Assistance .............172,177
Roll Over Warning ..................8
Roof Type Carrier ..................65
Rotation, Tires ..................296
S
Safety.......................153
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle............234
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...........235
Safety Defects, Reporting .............309
Safety, Exhaust Gas ................235
Safety Features ..................153
SafetyInformation,Tire..............284
SafetyTips....................233
Satellite Radio ..................155
Saved Radio Stations ...............158
Schedule, Maintenance ...........253, 255
Seat Belt Reminder .................79
Seat Belts ..................208, 234
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ............210
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .....210
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .210
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) .......211
Child Restraints ................222
Energy Management Feature .........211
Extender ...................211
Front Seat ................208, 209
Inspection ..................234
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .........209
Lap/Shoulder Belts ..............208
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .........210
Operating Instructions .............209
Pregnant Women ...............211
Pretensioners .................211
Rear Seat ...................208
Reminder ...................208
Seat Belt Extender ...............211
Seat Belt Pretensioner .............211
Untwisting Procedure .............210
Seat Belts Maintenance ..............299
Seats....................26, 31, 32
Adjustment ...............26, 27, 31
Easy Entry ...................32
Heated .....................32
Memory ....................25
Rear Folding ................26, 28
Reclining....................27
Seatback Release ...............26
Tilting .....................26
Vented.....................33
Ventilated ...................33
Security Alarm
Arm The System ................20
Disarm The System ...............20
Security System.................20, 81
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......304, 306
Send&Go..................173,177
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..............16
Sentry Key Replacement ..............
16
Service Assistance ................307
INDEX 317
11
Service Contract .................308
Service Manuals .................310
Settings, Audio ..................158
Shifting.......................91
Automatic Transmission ...........91,92
Shoulder Belts ..................208
Signals, Turn ...............84,235, 283
Sirius Satellite Radio ...............155
Favorites ...................157
Replay ....................156
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
BrowseinSXM ................157
Favorites ...................157
Replay ....................156
Smart Watch ...................176
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .............295
SnowTires....................293
SOSCall...................168,176
Spare Tires ...............241,293, 294
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ................306
Oil ......................306
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ..................104
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ............108
Cancel ....................105
Resume ....................105
Set......................104
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........104,105
Starting ......................87
Button .....................17
Cold Weather ..................89
Engine Fails To Start ..............89
Remote ....................18
Starting And Operating ...............87
Starting Procedures.................87
Steering......................24
Power.....................102
Tilt Column ...................24
Wheel, Heated .................25
Wheel, Tilt ...................24
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...........154
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ......154
Stolen Vehicle Assistance ...........174,177
Storage ......................53
Storage, Vehicle ................52,298
Store Radio Presets ................158
StoringYourVehicle................298
Sunglasses Storage.................53
SunRoof....................61,62
Sunshade Operation ................62
SunVisor......................37
Sway Control, Trailer ................197
Symbol Glossary ...................9
Synthetic Engine Oil ................264
System
Vehicle Security .................20
System, Remote Starting ..............18
T
Telescoping Steering Column ............24
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........52
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ...............65
Tilt Steering Column ................24
Tire And Loading Information Placard .......287
TireMarkings...................284
Tires...............235, 290, 293, 297
Aging (Life Of Tires) ..............292
Air Pressure ..................290
Chains ....................295
Changing ...................239
Compact Spare ................293
General Information ...........290, 293
High Speed ..................290
Inflation Pressure ...............290
LifeOfTires..................292
Load Capacity .................287
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ....82,204
Quality Grading ................297
Radial .....................291
Replacement .................292
Rotation ...................296
Safety..................284,290
Sizes.....................285
SnowTires ..................293
Spare Tires .............241,293, 294
Spinning ...................291
TrailerTowing.................126
Tread Wear Indicators .............291
Wheel Nut Torque ...............301
TireSafetyInformation ..............284
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...........125
To Open Hood ...................62
Towing....................121,251
Disabled Vehicle ................251
Guide.....................124
Recreational .................130
Weight ....................124
Towing Behind A Motorhome............130
TowNGo......................97
Traction Control ..................197
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .............197
TrailerTowing...................121
Hitches ....................123
Minimum Requirements ............125
Tips......................129
Trailer And Tongue Weight ...........125
Wiring.....................128
TrailerTowingGuide................124
TrailerWeight...................124
Transfer Case ...................276
Electronically Shifted ............95, 96
318 INDEX
Fluid .....................305
Maintenance .................276
Transmission ....................92
Automatic.................92, 275
Fluid .....................305
Maintenance .................275
Shifting.....................91
Transporting Pets .................233
Tread Wear Indicators ...............291
Turn Signals..................84,283
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features ..............163
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone ....................164
Uconnect Phone ...............160,161
Uconnect Phone
...............161
Uconnect Phone
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call Currently
In Progress ..................163
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call Cur-
rently In Progress ...............163
Bluetooth Communication Link .........166
Call Continuation ...............164
Call Controls .................163
Call Termination ................164
Cancel Command ...............161
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio
DeviceAfterPairing..............162
HelpCommand ................161
JoinCalls...................164
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite . . .162
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress ...................164
Managing Your Favorites ............163
Natural Speech ................160
Operation ...................160
Overview ...................159
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone .161
Phonebook Download .............162
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ........164
Power-Up ...................166
Recent Calls ..................163
Redial.....................164
TogglingBetweenCalls ............164
ToRemoveAFavorite .............163
Touch-Tone Number Entry ...........163
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ....164
VoiceCommand................164
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features .......21
Uconnect System .................152
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ............297
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) If
Equipped
.................38
Unleaded Gasoline ................302
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ..........210
V
VanityMirrors....................36
Vehicle Finder ................173,177
Vehicle Health Alert ................175
Vehicle Health Report ...............174
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........301
Vehicle Loading ...............120, 287
Vehicle Maintenance ...............264
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...........9
Vehicle Notifications ................175
Vehicle Security System...............20
Vehicle Storage ................52,298
Viscosity, Engine Oil ................264
VoiceCommand..................35
Voice Recognition System (VR) ...........35
W
Warning Flashers, Hazard .............237
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions). . .81
Warnings, Roll Over .................8
Warranty Information
.............309
Washers, Windshield .............45,263
Washing Vehicle..................299
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ............294
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ............294
Wi-Fi.......................173
WindBuffeting...................61
Window Fogging ..................52
Windows......................60
Power .....................60
ResetAuto-Up .................61
Windshield Defroster ...............234
Windshield Washers..............45,263
Fluid .....................263
Windshield Wiper Blades .............269
Windshield Wipers .................45
Wipers Blade Replacement ............269
Wipers,Intermittent.................45
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ...............46
Wireless Charging Pad ...............59
INDEX 319
11
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can
result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly
recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers,
portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should
never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself unable to devote your full attention to
vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces
prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Dodge
brand
vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit
mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Dodge brand dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a
complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-423-6343 or by contacting
your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain
a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling
1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes
are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and
then drive.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be
seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking,
don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or
use public transportation.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard
or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no
longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in
this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and
specications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most
up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the
website on the back cover.
Vehicle images are for illustration purposes only. Actual products sold may vary.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA) CALL
1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump
Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside
Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to
restrictions and conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
First Edition
24_WD_OM_EN_USC
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S
MANUAL, RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
Canada
U.S.
mopar.com/om
©2023 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under license. Dodge est une marque
déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc., utilisée sous le permis. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
The Dodge app puts the latest in connectivity and convenience in the palm of your hand. The App provides access to your remote vehicle commands (if properly
equipped), service history, My Garage and the Digital Glovebox. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword
“Dodge” (U.S. residents only).
2024 DURANGO
2024 DURANGO
OWNER’S MANUAL
